2007 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while your are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and
the name DTS are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to make
changes after that time without notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn about
the features and controls for the vehicle. Pictures
and words work together in the owner manual to
explain things.
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15870507 A First Printing
©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do
Not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for seat
positions. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Front Seats
Power Seats
Power Lumbar
The power seat
controls are located
on the outboard side
of the seats.
The power lumbar
controls are located on
the outboard side of
the front seats behind
the power seat controls.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the control forward or rearward.
Press the lumbar control forward to increase
support and rearward to decrease support.
Press the top or bottom of the control to raise
or lower the support mechanism.
The ignition does not need to be on for the power
lumbar feature to work.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the control up or down.
The front seats also have power reclining
page 13.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Massaging Lumbar
Heated and Cooled Seats
Your vehicle may have heated and cooled
front seats.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the switch is
located on the outboard
side of the front seats
behind the lumbar
switch. Press the switch
to turn the massaging
lumbar feature on. The
ignition must be on.
To operate the heated or cooled seats, the ignition
must be on.
The buttons are located
on the front doors.
The massage cycle will run for up to 10 minutes.
To stop massage, press the massaging lumbar
switch again, or press the power lumbar switch.
Driver’s Side Buttons
Shown, Passenger’s
Side Buttons Similar
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn
on the heated seatback.
H (Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn on the
cooled seat.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this
button to turn on the heated seat and seatback.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel
Press a button to turn on the desired feature.
A light on that button will display to show which
feature is on.
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
There are three temperature settings for each
feature. A column of three lights next to the buttons
will display which setting the feature is in: high,
medium or low. Three lights indicate the highest
setting, two lights for medium and one light for the
lowest setting.
The controls for this feature are located on the
driver’s door panel, and are used to program and
recall memory settings for the driver’s seat, outside
mirror, and the steering wheel position if the vehicle
has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering
feature.
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at
the highest setting. Each time you press the button,
the feature will go down one temperature setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button
until the display lights turn off.
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is
started using the remote keyless entry transmitter,
the front heated seats will be turned on to the high
setting if it is cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle
Start” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
into the ignition and the ignition is turned on, the
heated seat feature will turn off. To turn the heated
seat feature back on, press the desired button.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save your positions in memory, do the
following:
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory
feature is on, automatic seat and mirror movement
will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL”
for more information.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the steering wheel to a comfortable position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound
through the driver’s side front speaker to let
you know that the position has been stored.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at
any time, press one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power
mirror buttons.
A second seating, mirror, and steering wheel
position can be programmed by repeating
the above steps and pressing button 2 for a
second driver.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or
the steering column while recalling a memory
position, the driver’s seat and/or the steering
column recall may stop. If this happens remove
the obstruction, then press the appropriate control
for the area that is not recalling for two seconds.
Try recalling the memory position again by
pressing the appropriate memory button.
If the memory position is still not recalling,
see your dealer for service.
To recall your memory positions, the vehicle must
be in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1
or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving
position. The seat, outside mirrors, and steering
wheel will move to the position previously stored for
the identified driver. You will hear a single beep.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Exit Seat
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The control for this feature is located on the
driver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
Your seats have power
reclining seatbacks. Use
the vertical power seat
control located on the
outboard side of the
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can
be recalled by pressing the exit button. You will
hear a single beep. The driver’s seat will move
back, and if the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and
telescopic steering feature, the power telescopic
steering column will move up and forward.
seat to operate them.
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC,
automatic seat and power telescopic steering
column movement will occur when the key
is removed from the ignition. See “EASY EXIT
page 252 for more information.
• To recline the seatback, press the control
toward the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward
the front of the vehicle.
Further programming for automatic seat and
steering wheel movement can be done using the
Driver Information Center (DIC). You can select
or not select the following:
• The easy exit seat feature
• The memory seat recall feature
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise a front seat
head restraint, pull up on
the restraint. To lower it,
press the button, located
on the top of the
Head Restraints
seatback, and push the
head restraint down.
To adjust the height of a rear seat head restraint,
pull up or push down on the restraint.
The front seat head restraints can also tilt forward
and rearward. The rear seat head restraints do
not tilt.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The height of all the head restraints can be
adjusted.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Seat
Rear Seats
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have heated rear seats.
To operate the rear heated seats, the ignition
must be on.
The buttons are located
on the rear doors.
Your vehicle may have a front center seat.
This seat can be converted to a storage area by
lowering the seatback. See Center Flex Storage
For information on safety belts for this position,
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn
on the heated seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this
button to turn on the heated seat and seatback.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press a button to turn on the desired feature.
A light on that button will display to show which
feature is on.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may be equipped with four-way
lumbar support, without the massage feature, for
the outboard rear seat positions.
There are three temperature settings for each
feature. A column of three lights next to the buttons
will display which setting the feature is in: high,
medium or low. Three lights indicate the highest
setting, two lights for medium and one light for the
lowest setting.
The rear lumbar support
controls are located on
the rear doors in front of
the heated seat buttons.
When you press a button, the feature will turn on
at the highest setting. Each time you press the
button, the feature will go down one temperature
setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button
until the display lights turn off.
To turn on the lumbar support feature, press the
front of the control to increase support or rearward
to decrease support. The lumbar control can also
be moved up and down to adjust the location of the
support.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear
page 102.
The ignition does not need to be on for the power
lumbar feature to work.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts.
on page 218.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is
why: They work.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would
not survive. But most crashes are in between. In
many of them, people who buckle up can survive
and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could
have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you from
things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there are
different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see Older
on page 43. Follow those rules for everyone’s
protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
1. Close and lock the door.
Be sure to use the correct buckle when buckling
your lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch
plate will not go fully into the buckle, see if you
are using the buckle for the center passenger
position.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure. If the belt is not long enough,
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all
times.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your dealer
to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt in a crash.
To move it down, press
the release button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can move
the height adjuster up
just by pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pressing the
release button to make sure it has locked into
position.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
page 24.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Front Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone
can sit in the center position.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as
shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the
lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
When you sit in the center front seating position,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Rear Seat Passengers
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The latch plates for the safety belts in each rear
seating position vary in size. If the center rear
or the left rear latch plate is inserted into the
incorrect buckle, the plate will not latch properly.
Be sure you are using the correct buckle and
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the
buckle.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back and start
again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the pelvic bones. And
you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If
you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for small
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide better positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on
the side of the seatback.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place
the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
be seriously injured. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. The person wearing the belt could
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
page 34. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
CAUTION: (Continued)
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Slide the guide into
its storage pocket on the top of the seatback.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order
it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably
other new parts for your safety belt system. See
page 85.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
Child Restraints
belts?
Older Children
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross
the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
page 37. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure
that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts
provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the
United States and in every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be restrained while in
a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children
ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate restraints.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Young children should not use the vehicle’s adult
safety belts alone, unless there is no other
choice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
{CAUTION:
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether
or not the restraint will be compatible with
the motor vehicle in which it will be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back
and shoulders. Infants always should be
secured in appropriate infant restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint
with the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,
or position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system
is a portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in the
vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child
restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint,
be sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards. Then follow the instructions for the
restraint. You may find these instructions on the
restraint itself or in a booklet, or both.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats have
a five-point harness. A booster seat can also help a
child to see out the window.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,
and to this manual. The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that
came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the
child within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors
more information. A child can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the
front seat. We, therefore, recommend that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an
infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older
child riding in a booster seat.
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbags are off.
{CAUTION:
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A child in a child restraint in the center
front seat can be badly injured or killed by
the right front passenger’s airbag if it
inflates. Never secure a child restraint in
the center front seat. It is always better to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether,
you must also use either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. A
child restraint must never be installed using only the
top tether and anchor.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments. The following
explains how to attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on
the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor
in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the
anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Some child restraints that have top tethers are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always
to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a top tether.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your
child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Rear Seat
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
lower anchors has two
labels, near the crease
between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the trim cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the trim
covers on the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open
the trim cover to access the anchors. Be sure to use
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 51 for additional information.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacturer.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not
have lower attachments or the desired seating
position does not have lower anchors, secure
the child restraint with the top tether and the
safety belts. Refer to your child restraint
manufacturer instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint
to the lower anchors.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the head
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim
cover to expose the anchor.
restraint.
2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top
tether according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under
the head restraint and in
between the head
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over
the head restraint.
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to
secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and see Lower Anchors
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back
all the way. The safety belt will move freely again
and be ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A
rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
page 51.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 220 for more information on this including
important safety information.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center
front seat can be badly injured or killed
by the right front passenger’s airbag if it
inflates. Never secure a child restraint in
the center front seat. It is always better to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
Do not secure a child restraint in the center front
seat position.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Power Seats
on page 9.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbags are off.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
the child restraint has a top tether.
CAUTION: (Continued)
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 77. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even
if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the child restraint in this
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit when
you turn the ignition to RUN or START.
page 220.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You
should not be able to pull more of the belt from
the retractor once the lock has been set.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the
overhead console will be lit and stay lit
when the key is turned to RUN or START.
• A frontal airbag for the driver and another
frontal airbag for the right front passenger, and
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for
the driver and another for the right front
passenger.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint.
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and passenger directly behind the driver, and
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
in rollover, rear crashes, or in many side
crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and
roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear
crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate
CAUTION: (Continued)
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags
inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults,
but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly
in your vehicle. To read how, see Older
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag
symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
page 219 for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to
the door.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
If your vehicle has one, the roof-mounted side
impact airbag for the driver and the person seated
directly behind the driver is in the ceiling above
the side windows.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. If your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your
vehicle by routing the rope or tie-down
through any door or window opening. If
you do, the path of an inflating airbag will
be blocked. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.
If your vehicle has one, the roof-mounted side
impact airbag for the right front passenger and the
person seated directly behind that passenger is
in the ceiling above the side windows.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a “dual depth” passenger airbag
that adjusts the restraint according to crash
severity, seat location, and safety belt status
using electronic frontal sensor(s) and other special
sensors which enable the sensing system to
monitor the status of the front passenger safety
belt and the position of the front passenger seat.
The passenger airbag inflates to a reduced depth
when the passenger seat is in a forward position.
For more rearward front seating positions, the
passenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth
(a full deployment), based on safety belt status and
the crash severity measured early in the event.
Always wear your safety belt, even with frontal
airbags.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 17 to 23 mph (27 to 37 km/h)
if the other sensors do not over-ride this. The
threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
Your vehicle has a “dual stage” driver airbag,
which adjusts the restraint according to crash
severity using electronic frontal sensor(s) which
help the sensing system distinguish between
a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. The “dual stage” driver airbag
inflates to a level less than full deployment for
moderate frontal impacts and to a full deployment
for more severe frontal impacts.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
The passenger seat position sensor and passenger
safety belt buckle switch provide information which
is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at
a reduced level or full deployment.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
Side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact
airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed “threshold level.” The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design. Side
impact airbags are not intended to inflate in many
frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear
impacts. Both roof-mounted side impact airbags will
deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,
the airbags could inflate at a different
crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle of
the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows
down. For side impact airbags, inflation is
determined by the location and severity of the
impact.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,
rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has sensors which enable the
sensing system to monitor the position of
the right front passenger’s seat, whether
the occupant is buckled or unbuckled.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a
crash. The sensing system triggers a release of
gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The
inflator, airbag and related hardware are all part of
the airbag modules. Frontal airbag modules are
located inside the steering wheel and the
instrument panel. For vehicles with seat-mounted
side impact airbags, there are also airbag modules
in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-mounted side impact
airbags, there are also airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side window.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate
to severe side collisions, even belted occupants
can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags
supplement the protection provided by safety belts.
Airbags distribute the force of the impact more
evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side
impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
many frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and
rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe side
collisions for vehicles with side impact airbags.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag
inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags may still
be at least partially inflated minutes after the vehicle
comes to rest. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
airbag, the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest to
the door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags,
and the area along the ceiling of your vehicle near
the side windows for roof-mounted side impact
airbags — may be hot for a short time. The parts of
the airbag that come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,
and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers off by using the controls for those
features.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
The passenger airbag status indicator on the
overhead console will be visible when you turn
your ignition key to RUN or START.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON
or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag systems. Improper service can mean
that an airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer for service.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain conditions. The
driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbags are off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbags are off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the
seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two minutes. This
will allow the system to detect that person and then
enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of
adult size is sitting properly in the right front
passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to be enabled, the
on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, depending upon the person’s
seating posture and body build. Everyone in your
vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator
is lit, it could be because that person is
not sitting properly in the seat.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can
affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. You may want to consider not using
seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if
your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See
more on this, including important safety
information.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several
places around your vehicle. You do not want the
system to inflate while someone is working on your
vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
page 490.
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, overhead console, ceiling headliner,
ceiling and pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted
airbag modules, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, front
end or side sheet metal, they may keep the
airbag system from working properly. Also,
the airbag system may not work properly if you
relocate any of the airbag sensors. If you have
any questions about this, you should contact
Customer Assistance before you modify your
vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
or the airbag covering on the driver’s and
right front passenger’s seatback, or the side
impact airbag covering (if equipped) on
the ceiling near the side windows, the bag may
not work properly. You may have to replace
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both
the airbag module and the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s airbag, the
airbag module and seatback for the driver’s
and right front passenger’s seat-mounted side
impact airbags, or side impact airbag module
and ceiling covering for the roof-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped). Do not open or
break the airbag coverings.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Collision damage also may mean you will need
to have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was
not being used at the time of the collision.
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace
airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag
system earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new retractor assembly will be there to help protect
you in a collision.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or if
your airbag readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash, then
you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar®
system with an active subscription and you lock
your keys inside the vehicle, OnStar® may be
able to send a command to unlock your vehicle.
information.
Master Key
Valet Key
There is a master key that can be used for the
driver’s door, ignition, and glove box.
There is also a valet key which only operates the
driver’s door and the ignition.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating
range. This is normal for any RKE system.
If the transmitter does not work or if you have to
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter
to work, try this:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will have one of the RKE transmitters below.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
functions, including lock, unlock, remote trunk
release, vehicle locator/panic alarm and remote
vehicle start, if your vehicle has this feature,
will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away.
If your vehicle has the remote vehicle start
feature, you will be able start your vehicle with the
RKE transmitter. However, the range may be
less while the vehicle is running and you may need
to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than
you were to turn it on.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote
The following functions are available with your
vehicle’s remote keyless entry system:
/(Remote Vehicle Start): Your vehicle may be
started from outside the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” later in this
section for more detailed information.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The transaxle must be in PARK (P) for this feature
to operate.
Q(Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the
doors. If enabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the parking lamps may flash once to
indicate locking has occurred, or the horn may chirp
when the lock button is pressed again within
five seconds from the previous press of the lock
page 252 for additional information. If the vehicle
has the content theft-deterrent system, pressing the
lock button may also arm it. See Content
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release this button to locate your vehicle. The turn
signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound
three times. Press and hold this button for more
than two seconds to activate the panic alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will
sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm
will turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or
the alarm button is pressed again. The ignition
must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again within
five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.
The interior lamps will come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps can
be programmed to come on for a set amount of time
when the vehicle is unlocked using the RKE
page 252. Pressing the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter may disarm the content theft-deterrent
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased through your GM dealer.
Remember to bring any additional transmitters so
they can also be re-coded to match the new
transmitter. Once your dealer has coded the new
transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. The vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it. See RELEARN
REMOTE KEY under DIC Controls and Displays
on page 233.
V(Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold this
button for about one second to release the trunk lid.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the
RKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings
information.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter, do the following:
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from
your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the
notch on the side of the transmitter and
separate the bottom half from the top half.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a
metal object to do this.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with
the positive side of the battery facing down.
Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together tightly so moisture does not get in.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a
metal object to do this.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with
the positive side of the battery facing up. Use a
type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together tightly so moisture does not get in.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do
the following:
1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into the
notch, located above the metal base, and
separate the bottom half from the top half of
the transmitter.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle
is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
Remote Vehicle Start
The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to
start the engine from outside of the vehicle.
It also starts up the vehicle’s automatic climate
control system. When the remote start system is
active, the climate control system will heat
and cool the inside of the vehicle according to the
previous settings of the system before turning
the vehicle off. The rear window defogger will be
turned on by the climate control system when
it is cold outside. If the vehicle has heated seats,
they will also turn on. See Heated and Cooled
Cooled seats are not activated during a remote
start. Normal operation of the climate control
system will return after the key is turned to RUN.
Your RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation.
However, the range may be less while the vehicle
is running. As a result, you may need to be
closer to your vehicle to turn it off, than you were
to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see “Remote
Keyless Entry System Operation” listed previously
for additional information.
/(Remote Start): Press and release the lock
button and then press and hold this button to use
the remote start feature.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may
require a person using remote start to have
the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local
regulations for any requirements on remote starting
of vehicles.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,
do the following:
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and
press the remote start button until the
parking lamps turn off.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock
button, then immediately press and hold
the transmitter’s remote start button until the
turn signal lights flash or if the vehicle’s
lights are not visible, press and hold the
remote start button for at least four seconds.
The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the
remote start button again after the vehicle has
started will turn off the ignition.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The remote vehicle start feature provides two
separate starts, each with 10 minutes of engine
running, or it provides one start with 10 minutes of
engine running that may be extended 10 more
minutes. If you press and release the transmitter
lock button and then press and hold the remote
start button on the RKE transmitter again before the
first 10 minutes of engine running time has expired,
10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after five minutes of
the engine run time, 10 minutes are added and you
now have 15 minutes of engine running. The added
ten minutes are considered a second remote
vehicle start. Once two remote starts or a single
start with a time extension have been used, the
vehicle must be started with the ignition key before
you can use the remote start feature again.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps
will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is
running.
3. If it is your first remote start since last driving,
repeat these steps while the engine is still
running for a 10 minute time extension.
Remote start can be extended two times.
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start
and the engine is still running, insert the key into the
ignition, and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if
the key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if
there is an emission control system malfunction.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high,
or the oil pressure is too low.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system
may be disabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “REMOTE START” under DIC
information.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
safety information when using remote start in
a closed garage.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it may have the remote start
ready feature. This feature allows your dealer to
add the manufacturer’s remote vehicle start
feature. See your dealer if you would like to add
the manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature
to your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Central Door Unlocking System
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking mode.
When unlocking the driver’s door, you can
unlock the other doors at the same time by turning
the key clockwise in the door lock cylinder twice.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
armrest on the front doors.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
K(Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the
unlock symbol to unlock the doors.
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent
system, you must unlock the doors with the key or
remote keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting
off the alarm.
Q(Lock): Press the side of the switch with the
lock symbol to lock the doors.
From the outside, use either the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches
or manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs
are located at the top of the door panel near the
window.
Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the knob.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the
doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the shift
lever is moved out of PARK (P), all the doors will
lock. The doors will unlock every time you stop the
vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK (P).
The rear door security locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear door. You must open the
rear doors to access them.
To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle will
have one of the following:
If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is
not in PARK (P), have the person use the
manual lock knob or power door lock switch.
When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual lock knob or power
door lock switch to lock the door.
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on,
the door locks can be programmed through
prompts displayed on the Driver Information Center
(DIC). These prompts allow the driver to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For programming
page 252.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Turn the knob to the vertical position to
engage the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened
from the inside when this feature is in use.
Lockout Protection
If the key is in the ignition and the power door lock
switch is used to lock the doors, all doors will
lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
It is always recommended that you remove the
ignition key when locking your vehicle.
When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the front door power lock
switch, or by lifting the rear door manual
lock knob.
The lockout protection feature can be overridden
by holding the power door lock switch for
three seconds or longer.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Turn the knob to the horizontal position to
disengage the lock.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Trunk
G(Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunk
release button is located to the left of the
steering wheel next to the instrument panel
brightness control. Press the button to open the
trunk. To use this feature, your vehicle must be in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet
lockout switch must be off.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk
lid open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you
must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable
You can also press the button with the trunk
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
to open the trunk. To disable this feature,
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
•
•
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that will
force outside air into your vehicle.
See Climate Control System.
•
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk
release handle located inside the trunk near the
latch. This handle will glow following exposure
to light. Pull the release handle to open the trunk
from the inside.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Rear Seat Pass-Through
Your vehicle has a small door in the rear seat.
This door allows you to access the trunk from
inside the vehicle.
The rear seat armrest must be down for the
pass-through door to open. To release the
pass-through door, move the release up with your
fingers. To close the door, raise it and push it
until it latches.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk as it
could damage the handle. The emergency
trunk release handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
them to open the trunk from the inside.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the switch up to raise the window. Your
vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off. For more
information, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 115.
Power Windows
The power window
switches are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
Express-Down Window
This feature is on all windows. Press the switch
to the second position and release the switch to
activate the express-down feature. To stop the
window as it is lowering, press down or pull
up briefly on the switch again.
Express-Up Window
In addition, each door has a switch for its own
window. The front power window switch operates
with two positions for both up and down
movement and the rear power window switch
operates with one position for up and two positions
for down movement. Press the switch to the first
position to lower the window to the desired level.
This feature is on the front windows. Pull the
switch up to the second position and release
the switch to activate the express-up feature.
To stop the window as it is raising, pull up or
press down briefly on the switch again.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming the Power Windows
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the
express-up feature to work. Before reprogramming,
you will need to replace or recharge your vehicle’s
battery.
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop
at the obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset
factory position. Weather conditions such as
severe icing may also cause the window to
auto-reverse. The window will return to normal
operation once the obstruction or condition
is removed.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active, close all doors.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
2. Press and hold the power window switch until
the window is fully open.
{CAUTION:
3. Pull the power window switch up until the
window is fully closed.
If express override is activated, the
window will not reverse automatically.
You or others could be injured and the
window could be damaged. Before you
use express override, make sure that all
people and obstructions are clear of the
window path.
4. Continue holding the switch up for
approximately two seconds after the window
is completely closed.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the
process for the other windows.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position.
The window will rise for as long as the switch is
held. Once the switch is released, the express
mode is re-activated.
Sun Visors
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare.
It can also be detached from the center mount
and moved to the side while the auxiliary
sunshade remains to block the glare from the
front. The visors also have side-to-side slide
capability.
In this mode, the window can still close on an
object in its path. Use care when using the
override mode.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout
button is located on the driver’s door armrest
near the window switches.
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to view the
mirror. The light will come on when the cover
is opened. It will go out when you close the cover.
If your vehicle has the adjustable lighting feature,
slide the switch up or down to brighten or dim
the light.
Press the right side of the button to disable the
rear window controls. The light on the button
will illuminate, indicating the feature is in use.
The rear windows still can be raised or lowered
using the driver’s window switches when the
lockout feature is active.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the
button again. The light on the button will go out.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Power Sunshade
If your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helps
to reduce the amount of heat and light entering
the rear window.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
The switch is located on
the overhead console.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
The rear power sunshade is located in the rear
shelf. It only works while the ignition is on or while
the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
To raise the power sunshade, press and release
the switch. To close the power sunshade,
press and release the switch again.
Never store objects on the rear shelf because they
may get caught in the sunshade or be tossed
about in your vehicle.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9(Off): Press this side of the button to turn the
lockout feature off. When the lockout feature is off,
you can open the trunk using either the keyless
entry transmitter or the trunk release button located
near the headlamp switch on the instrument panel.
Content Theft-Deterrent
The security light is
located on the
instrument panel cluster.
R(On): Press this side of the button to turn the
lockout feature on. When the lockout feature
is turned on, the trunk cannot be unlocked with
the keyless entry transmitter or the trunk release
button located near the headlamp switch on
the instrument panel.
If the ignition is off and any door is open, the
security light will flash, reminding you to arm
the system.
If the valet lockout feature is on it will also
disable the Universal Home Remote transmitter,
if equipped.
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using the power door lock
switch with the door open or the remote
keyless entry transmitter. The security light
should come on and stay on.
Locking the glove box with your key will also help
to secure your vehicle.
for additional information.
3. Close all the doors. The security light should
go off within approximately 30 seconds.
If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or a
remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will
sound and the lamps will flash for about
30 seconds.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock
the doors with a key or use the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use a power door lock
with the door open or the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Changes or modifications made to this system by
other than an authorized service facility could
void authorization to use the theft system.
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window,
then get out of the vehicle, keeping the
door open.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the
following:
• The vehicle should be locked with the door
key or the manual door lock after the doors
are closed if you do not want to arm the
theft-deterrent system.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door
open, lock the vehicle using the power door
lock or the remote keyless entry system
and close the door. Wait 30 seconds until the
security lamp goes off.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the
remote keyless entry transmitter system.
Pressing the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter disables the
theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door any
other way will activate the alarm when a
door or the trunk is opened.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the
manual lock and open the door. The horn
will sound and the hazard lights will flash.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s
door with your key, using the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter or by starting
the car with a valid key.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the
driver’s door with your key. You can also turn
off the alarm by using the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter system,
or by starting the car with a valid key.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
be replaced, you may need to have your vehicle
serviced.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency
transponder in the key that matches a decoder
in your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.
At this time, you may also want to check the fuse,
If the engine still does not start with the other key,
your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does
start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer
who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new
key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance.
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you do not
have to do anything special to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you insert or remove
the key from the ignition or transition the key from
run, accessory or start from the off position.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it prevents
the vehicle from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of
electrical key codes.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to nine additional keys may
be programmed for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer or
a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
If the engine does not start and the security light
comes on when trying to start the vehicle, the
key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is
cut exactly as the ignition key that operates
the system.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key do the following:
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key
in the ignition and start the engine. If the
engine will not start, see your dealer
for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
OFF, and remove the key.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and
turn it to the RUN position within five seconds
of removing the original key.
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
5. The security light will turn off once the key
has been programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
If you are driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your
engine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
may not be working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle
and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (OFF): This is the only position in which the
ignition key can be inserted or removed.
This position locks the ignition and transaxle.
It is a theft-deterrent feature.
Ignition Positions
With the ignition key in the ignition, the key can be
turned to four different positions:
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio and
windshield wipers operate while the engine is off.
To use ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.
C (RUN): This position is where the key returns to
after the vehicle is started. This position displays
some of the warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACCESSORY or RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or
break the key. Use the correct key and turn the
key only with your hand. Make sure the key
is in all the way. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will display DRIVER
DOOR OPEN when the driver’s door is opened
if the ignition is in OFF, ACCESSORY and the
key is in the ignition. See DIC Warnings and
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key In the Ignition
Starting the Engine
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
Place the transaxle in the proper gear.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position – this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will
go down as your engine gets warm.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be
used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key
is turned from RUN to OFF:
• Radio
• Power Windows
Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transaxle
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Sunroof
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes
or if the driver’s door is opened. If you want power
for another 10 minutes, close all the doors and turn
the ignition key to RUN and then back to OFF.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to the START
position, and then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning
the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY or
OFF position.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for up to
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transaxle gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking motor,
and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your dealer. If you do not, your engine might
not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get
easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater
should be plugged in a minimum of four hours
prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is
not required.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You could
be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt
AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s
side of the engine, behind the transaxle
dipstick/fluid fill location and next to the engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
{CAUTION:
The automatic transaxle may have a shift lever
located either on the steering column or on
the console between the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a
There are several different positions for the
shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start
the engine because your vehicle cannot move
easily.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system.
You have to fully apply your regular brakes before
you can shift from PARK (P) while the ignition
key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever
into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P)
on page 125.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and
forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without
damaging your transaxle. See If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 326
for additional information.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
high speed may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at
high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your
vehicle. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
DRIVE (D) can be used for towing. You may want
to shift the transaxle to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,
to a lower gear if the transaxle shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
information.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
push the accelerator all the way down.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed
more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
You might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)
when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.
The transaxle will shift down to the next gear
and have more power.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see Skidding
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes.
You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help
control your speed as you go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice
that it is moving slowly or not shifting gears
as you increase speed may damage the
transaxle. Have your vehicle serviced right
away. You can drive in SECOND (2) when you
are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and
DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.
Notice: Do not shift into SECOND (2) unless
you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or
you can damage your engine and/or transaxle.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than SECOND (2) without using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the
transaxle will not shift into first gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal
is located to the left of
the regular brake pedal,
near the driver’s door.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.
If you are stuck, do not spin the tires.
When stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or
parking brake to hold the vehicle in place.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the
parking brake pedal down with your left foot.
Performance Shifting
If your vehicle has this feature, it can detect a
change in driving patterns. If you make an
aggressive driving maneuver, the vehicle’s
transaxle automatically shifts to the lowest possible
gear to maximize vehicle performance. The vehicle
will automatically return to normal operation
when you return to normal driving patterns.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
on the instrument panel cluster should come
on. If it does not, you need to have your vehicle
serviced.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is
set, the ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). The brake light
will come on and stay on until the parking brake is
page 222 for more information.
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you are
page 336.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down with your right foot and push the
parking brake pedal down with your left foot.
When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal
will follow it to the released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Column Shift Lever
Console Shift Lever
If your vehicle has a steering column shift lever,
use the following procedure to shift the vehicle
into PARK (P):
If your vehicle is equipped with a console shift
lever, use the following procedure to shift
the vehicle into PARK (P):
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving
it up as far as it will go.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of your
vehicle and then to the left.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake
pedal down, set the parking brake.
information.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake
pedal down, set the parking brake.
information.
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight
of the vehicle may put too much force on the
parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find
it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
This is called torque lock. To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
page 122.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and your parking brake is firmly set before you
information.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is RUN. See Automatic
The shift lock control system is designed to do the
following:
• Prevent the ignition key from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• Prevent movement of the console shift lever
out of PARK (P) unless the ignition is in a
position other than OFF.
The shift lock control system is always functional
except in the case of a dead battery or low
voltage (less than 9 V) battery.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease the
pressure on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all
the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then move the shift lever into the gear
you want.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have
your vehicle serviced soon.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake after you
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
page 122.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Operation
Mirrors
AUTO 3: Press and hold the “auto highbeam”
button for approximately three seconds to turn
the compass on or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Intellibeam™, OnStar®, and
Compass
When the ignition and the compass feature are
on, the compass will show two character boxes
for about two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the compass heading.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror with OnStar® and a compass
Intellibeam™, see “Intellibeam Intelligent
High-Beam Headlamp Control System” under
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show the
correct direction, (N for North for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering
with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass
display in the upper right corner of the mirror face.
When on, the compass automatically calibrates
as the vehicle is driven.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the “auto
highbeam” button for approximately nine seconds
until a C is shown in the compass display.
Automatic Dimming
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. The automatic dimming
feature is activated whenever the vehicle is
turned on and dims only during nighttime driving.
The mirror can then be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if the
vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, such as a long distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust the
compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
If the mirror is not adjusted to account for zone
changes, the compass could give false readings.
To adjust for zone changes, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the “auto highbeam” button
approximately six seconds until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the “auto highbeam” button quickly until
you reach the correct zone number. Stop
pressing the button and the mirror will return to
normal operation. If C appears in the compass
window, the compass needs calibration.
See “Compass Calibration” listed previously.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Mirror Operation
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located
on the lower left side of the mirror face, for
about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming
feature on or off. The indicator light will illuminate
when this feature is active. The automatic dimming
feature is active each time the vehicle is started.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror with a compass display. The mirror
also contains OnStar® controls. For more
When the ignition and the compass feature are
on, the compass will show two character boxes
for about two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the compass heading.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass
display in the upper right corner of the mirror face.
When on, the compass automatically calibrates
as the vehicle is driven.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (for example, N for North),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering
with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
If the letter C should ever appear in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button
until a C is shown in the compass display.
Compass Variance
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if you live
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip,
it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. Stop
pressing the button and the mirror will return
to normal operation. If C appears in the
compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See Compass Calibration
listed previously.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance
zone number on the following zone map.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
When the ignition and the compass feature are
on, the compass will show two character boxes
for about two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the compass heading.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
Compass Calibration
See “Compass Calibration” under Automatic
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror with a compass display.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass
display in the upper right corner of the mirror face.
When on, the compass automatically calibrates
as the vehicle is driven.
Compass Variance
See “Compass Variance” under Automatic
Mirror Operation
Cleaning the Mirror
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located
on the lower left side of the mirror face, for
about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming
feature on or off. The indicator light will illuminate
when this feature is active. The automatic
dimming feature is active each time the vehicle
is started.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the mirror to its original position, push
outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to
their original unfolded position before driving.
If your vehicle has the power foldaway mirrors
feature, do the following:
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Your vehicle’s mirror
controls are located
on the driver’s
door armrest.
• Press (C) to unfold the mirrors.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded
manually, they may shake or flutter at normal
driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded
position. If this happens, you will need to reset the
mirrors. See “Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors” next.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the
four-way control pad to adjust the mirror.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors
if the following occurs:
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
If your vehicle has manual fold mirrors, the mirrors
can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car
wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and
unfold them three times using the mirror controls.
This will reset them to their normal position.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Convex Mirror
If the vehicle is equipped with this feature,
the driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled
by the on and off settings on the automatic
dimming rearview mirror.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors,
it will also be capable of performing the curb view
assist mirror feature. This feature will allow the
driver’s and passenger’s side mirror to tilt to a
factory programmed position when the vehicle is
in REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in
allowing you to view the curb when you are parallel
parking.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen
from the driver’s seat. This mirror does not have a
dimming feature.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R)
and either a five-second delay has occurred,
or the ignition is turned to OFF, the driver’s and
passenger’s side mirror will return to its original
position.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When you operate the rear window defogger, it
also warms both outside mirrors to help clear them
of fog or ice. See Dual Climate Control System
on page 204 for more information.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®
Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® button
to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
OnStar® System
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe
& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®
Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions &
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
Connections® Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar® services (such as Remote Door Unlock
or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be
available until you register with OnStar®.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel
your OnStar® service at any time by contacting
OnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®
Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms and
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used with
OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-Free
Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless
service plan, depending on eligibility. To find out
more, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in the
vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisor
by pressing the OnStar® button or calling
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
How OnStar® Service Works
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes
to access location-based weather, local traffic
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone
button and giving a few simple voice commands,
you can browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for more
information.
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
page 289 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the blue OnStar® button to confirm that your
OnStar® equipment is active.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Universal Home Remote
System
1. This device may not cause interference.
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides
a way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
3521A-GTE05A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is KOBGTE05A.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides
a way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
2791032007A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is CB2OHHL3.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another person
available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,
for future programming. You only need the
original remote control transmitter for fixed code
programming. It is also recommended that
upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing your Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) above the Universal Home Remote
System buttons, follow the instructions below.
If there is one triangular LED above the Universal
Home Remote System buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with one triangular LED).
This system provides a way to replace up to
three remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of
the garage door or security device you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
Fixed Code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed code
uses the same coded signal every time, which
is manually programmed by setting DIP switches
for a unique personal code.
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held
transmitter.
If you do not know if your garage door opener is a
fixed code or rolling code device, open your
garage door opener’s remote control battery cover.
Your garage door opener is a fixed code device
if there is a panel of switches. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code device.
Example of Switch Settings
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switch
settings from left to right. When the switch
is in the up position, write “on,” and when a
switch is in the down position, write “off”.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “middle”.
4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In order
from left to right, and within two and one-half
minutes, enter each switch setting into the
Universal Home Remote System. Push
one button for each switch as follows:
• Left button = “on” switch position.
• Right button = “off” switch position.
• Middle button = “middle” switch position.
3. Enter these positions into the Universal Home
Remote System as follows.
Press and release all three buttons at the same
time to put the device into programming mode.
5. After entering the switch settings, press and
release all three buttons at the same time.
The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light above
the selected button should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
Example
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosing
a different function button in Step 7 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press the two outside buttons at the same
time for one to two seconds, and immediately
release them.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
Rolling code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded
signal is changed every time your remote control
garage door opener is used.
Programming a rolling code garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so read the
entire procedure before you begin. If you do not
follow these actions, the device will time out
and you will have to repeat the procedure.
2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage door
motor head and press and release the
“learn” button.
After pressing the “learn” button, you have
10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4
depending on your garage control unit. If you
cannot locate the “learn” button, refer to
the owner’s guide for your garage door opener.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above
the selected button, should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from
five to 20 seconds.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
4. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.
5. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the
Universal Home Remote device, do the following:
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosing
a different function button in Step 4 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at
the same time for about 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
button will be erased.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 478.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
the programming steps.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future
Universal Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”
later in this section or, for assistance, see
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there is one triangular Light
Emitting Diode (LED) above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions
below. If your vehicle has three round LED above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with three round LED).
Be sure that people and objects are clear of
the garage door or gate operator you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the
stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage
door opener model manufactured before April 1,
1982. If you have a newer garage door opener
with rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6
through 8 to complete the programming of your
Universal Home Remote Transmitter.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and
more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside
Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash, after
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light.
20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat
this step to program a second and/or
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
two Universal Home Remote buttons.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of
the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant
light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following
to complete the programming of a rolling-code
device, most commonly, a garage door
opener.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button
and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
the same manner.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button
for two seconds, then release it. Immediately
press and hold the same button a second time
for two seconds, then release it. Immediately,
press and hold the same button a third time
for two seconds, then release.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
button until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote should now
activate the rolling-code device.
To program the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal Home Remote
buttons.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained, follow these steps:
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Remote button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on while the signal
is being transmitted.
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step
2 under “Programming Universal Home
Remote” shown earlier in this section.
To erase programming from the three Universal
Home Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 478.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage Area
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use
the key to lock and unlock.
Cupholder(s)
There are cupholders located in the full floor
console, or in the front of the center seat console.
Cupholders are also located in the rear armrest.
To access the full floor console cupholder slide the
cover back. To access the center seat console
cupholder, fold open the front of the console.
If your vehicle has a full floor console it has
two storage areas. To access the upper tray
storage, lift the left lever located in the front of the
armrest lid. To access the lower storage area,
lift the right lever. If your vehicle has a center
seat console it will have two storage areas.
Coinholder(s)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a coinholder.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the upper storage area, press the
button located on the front of the armrest and lift
the armrest lid. To access the lower storage
area, pull the strap located behind the cup holder.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat
center console and armrest. To open the console,
push the button and lift the lid. Inside the console
are two cupholders that can be pulled out
when in use.
Center Flex Storage Unit
Your vehicle may have a center flex storage unit
that includes a front center seat with a lap belt and
an underseat storage compartment. The center
seatback can also be used as a fold down armrest.
Cupholders are also located at the front edge of
the storage unit and can be accessed by
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may be equipped with a convenience
net. The convenience net attaches to the floor
of the trunk. Put small loads, like grocery
bags, behind the net.
folding the compartment forward.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them
in the trunk as far forward as you can. When not
using the net, hook the net to the tabs securing
it to the sill plate.
When not being used, the center seat lap belt can
be stored in the underseat storage compartment.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Open: The express open feature will
operate from the closed or partially open position.
To express open the power sunroof, fully press
the driver’s side switch rearward once. To stop the
sunroof glass in a desired position other than to
the express-open position, press the switch again,
in either direction, to stop the movement. If the
sunshade is in the closed position, it will open with
the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.
The switches that
operate the sunroof
are located on the
overhead console.
Vent Open: From the closed position, press and
hold the passenger’s side switch forward to
vent the sunroof. The rear of the sunroof panel will
tilt upward to the full vent position. The sunshade
must be opened manually.
Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be
turned to RUN or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active. See Retained Accessory Power
• From the open position, press and hold
the driver’s side sunroof switch forward.
The sunshade must be closed manually.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
page 210.
K. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
page 186.
N. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
page 355.
on page 118.
page 121.
H. Traction Control System Button (Column-Shift
Vehicles). See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 303.
I. Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist and
Adaptive Cruise Control Display (If Equipped).
R. Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped).
S. Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control. See
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
A tilt wheel lets you adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel
to the highest level to give your legs more room
when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that lets you tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
To tilt the wheel,
hold the wheel and
pull the lever. Then
move the wheel
to a comfortable
position and release
the lever to lock
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
the wheel in place.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button for this
feature is located on
the steering wheel.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power tilt
wheel control is located
on the outboard side
of the steering column.
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel
on or off. A light on the button will display while
the feature is turned on.
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control
up and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the
control down and the steering wheel will go down.
The steering wheel will take about three minutes
to start heating.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel
moves toward the front of the vehicle. Push
the control rearward and the steering wheel moves
toward the rear of the vehicle. To set the memory
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. The lever returns automatically when the turn
is complete. If you momentarily press and release
the lever, the turn signal will flash 3 times.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
and in the outside
rearview mirror will flash
in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
• 3Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
page 161.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to
flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the
lane change is complete. The lever returns
when it is released.
page 165.
on page 166.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will
sound and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
display TURN SIGNAL ON after driving about a
mile to remind you to turn it off. See DIC Warnings
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read
this entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned out signal
bulb. Other drivers will not see the turn signal.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs
if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward to change the headlamps from
low beam to high. Pull the lever back and then
release it to change from high beam to low.
1. This device may not cause interference.
This light on the
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides
an audible and visual alert if you approach a
vehicle too quickly that is directly ahead. FCA also
provides a visual alert with no audible alert if
you are following another vehicle much too closely.
The FCA alert symbol is located on top of the
instrument panel to the right of the driver.
FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar to
detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path, within
a distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
CAUTION: (Continued)
or animals. Your complete attention is
always required while driving and you
should be ready to take action and apply
the brakes. For more information, see
The FCA control is
located on the
steering wheel.
{CAUTION:
FCA is only a warning system and does
not apply the brakes. When you are
approaching a vehicle or object too
rapidly or when you are following a
vehicle too closely that is ahead of you,
FCA may not provide you with enough
time to avoid a collision. FCA is not
designed to warn the driver of pedestrians
To enable or disable FCA, press the Adaptive
Cruise Control button. See Adaptive Cruise Control
on page 173.
CAUTION: (Continued)
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCA is enabled when the green light on the
button is lit. FCA is disabled when the indicator
light is amber.
{CAUTION:
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another
Adaptive Cruise Control button, you might
go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose
control. Be careful not to press adaptive
cruise buttons unless you want to use
cruise control.
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, FCA may not detect
a vehicle ahead. You could crash into
a vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely on
FCA on winding roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as
in fog, rain, or snow, FCA
performance is limited. There may not
be enough warning distance to the
vehicle in front of you. Do not rely on
FCA in low visibility conditions.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alerting the Driver
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
The vehicle ahead symbol, located next to the
FCA symbol, will only appear when a vehicle
ahead of you is detected in your path. If this
symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
FCA will not respond to vehicles you may
see ahead. The symbol may disappear on curves,
highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when another
vehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCA
system will not detect the vehicle until it is
completely in your driving lane.
The FCA alert symbol
will flash and a warning
beep will sound
when driver action may
be required.
The alert symbol will flash when:
• Your vehicle is approaching another vehicle
too quickly.
{CAUTION:
• Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead of
you much too closely.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not
detect a vehicle ahead. FCA may not help
you avoid a collision under these
conditions. Do not use FCA when the radar
is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System”
page 173.
information.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or
dirt. If so, you may need to turn off the engine and
clean the lens. See “Cleaning the System”
{CAUTION:
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. You could
crash into an object ahead of you. Do not
rely on FCA when approaching stationary
or slow-moving vehicles or other objects.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam
headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
The flash-to-pass feature will only work with the
headlamps on. It does not work with Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
Unnecessary Alerts
FCA may occasionally provide alerts that you
consider unnecessary. It could respond to
a turning vehicle ahead of you, guard rails, signs,
and other stationary objects. This is normal
operation, your vehicle does not need service.
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you
to use.
If the headlamps are on high beam, they will
switch to low beam. To return to high beam,
push the lever away from you.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are
CLEAN RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
and SERVICE RADAR CRUISE. See DIC
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn
the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the
band with the wiper symbol on it.
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band
to off.
8(Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let
go. The wipers stop after one wipe. For more wipe
cycles, hold the band longer on mist.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades
become worn or damaged, replace with new
blades or blade inserts.
6 (Delay): Turn the band to choose the delay time
between wipe cycles. The wiper speed can be
set for a long or short delay between wipes. The
closer the band is set to the top of the lever,
the shorter the delay.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Your vehicle has wiper-activated headlamps.
After the windshield wipers have completed
eight wipe cycles within four minutes, the
headlamps automatically turn on. See Wiper
information.
6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from
you to the first solid band past the delay settings
for steady wiping at low speed.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and frequency of wipes. The highest sensitivity
setting, level five is closest to low. A single
wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper stalk
to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that the
sensitivity level has been increased.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture
sensor is mounted on the interior side of the
windshield behind the rearview mirror. It is used to
automatically operate the wipers by monitoring
the amount of moisture build-up on the windshield.
Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshield
depending on driving conditions and the sensitivity
setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will
occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more
frequently. The Rainsense™ II wipers operate in
a delay mode as well as a continuous low or
high speed as needed. If the system is left on for
long periods of time, occasional wipes may
occur without any moisture on the windshield. This
is normal and indicates that the Rainsense™ II
system is activated.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash
with the wipers on can damage them. Turn
the wipers off when going through an
automatic car wash.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and
are not affected by the Rainsense™ II function.
The Rainsense™ II system can be overridden at
any time by manually turning the wiper band to low
or high speed.
When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps will
turn on automatically. The headlamps will turn
off again once the wipers turn off if it is light
enough outside. If it is dark, they will remain on.
for more information.
The Rainsense™ II system can be activated by
turning the wiper band to one of the five sensitivity
levels indicated on the wiper stalk. The position
closest to off is the lowest sensitivity setting, level
one. This allows more rain or snow to collect
on the windshield between wipes. Turning
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items
on the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause
the moisture sensor to malfunction.
the wiper band away from you to higher sensitivity
levels increases the sensitivity of the system
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up
to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle,
it may take up to 20 seconds for each of the
remaining cycles. The heated windshield washer
fluid system may be turned off at any time by sliding
the switch on the turn signal/multifunction lever to
this position again.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer
nozzles for a short period of time before washer
fluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.
J (Washer Fluid): Press and release this
paddle, located at the top of the turn signal/
multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers will clear the windshield and
either stop or return to your preset speed. For more
washer cycles, press and hold the paddle.
A message will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is
page 239.
_ (Heated Washer Fluid): If your vehicle is
equipped, the heated windshield washer fluid
system may be used to help clear ice, snow, tree
sap, or bugs from your windshield. Sliding the
switch on the turn signal/multifunction lever to this
position and then releasing it will activate the
heated windshield washer fluid system. This
activation will initiate four heated wash/wipe cycles.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control
CAUTION: (Continued)
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This
is helpful on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When cruise control is on, you will see a
cruise light on the instrument panel cluster.
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
Traction Control System (TCS) begins to limit
wheel spin, the cruise control automatically turns
page 303. When road conditions let you safely use
it again, you can turn the cruise control back on.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
CAUTION: (Continued)
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
I (On): This position turns on the system.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to
a previously set speed.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
SET– (Set): Press this button to set the
speed.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise
control.
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake
is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level
is low.
The cruise control
buttons are located on
left side of the
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
steering wheel.
1. Press the cruise control button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET– button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This shuts off
the cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET– button, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. The
vehicle now cruises at the higher speed.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can press the
+RES (resume/accelerate) button to return to
your desired preset speed. The cruise light
displays again.
• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until you
get up to the desired speed, and then release
the button. To increase your speed in very
small amounts, briefly press the +RES button
and then release it. Each time you do this,
the vehicle accelerates approximately
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
The vehicle returns to and stays at your preset
speed. If you press and hold the +RES button, the
vehicle speed increases until you release the
button or apply the brake. Do not hold in the
+RES button, if you do not want the vehicle
speed to increase.
The accelerate feature only works after you have
set the cruise control speed by pressing the
SET– button.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills
depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.
Applying the brake or shifting into a lower gear
ends cruise control. If you need to apply the brake
or shift to a lower gear due to the grade of the
downhill slope, you might not want to attempt to
use the cruise control feature.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while
using cruise control:
• Press the SET– button until you reach the
lower desired speed, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET– button briefly. Each time you do this,
the vehicle slows down approximately
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to your previous cruise
control speed.
To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the
brake pedal, or press the cancel button on
the steering wheel.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the
ignition, your cruise control set speed memory
is erased.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Adaptive Cruise Control
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read
this entire section before using it.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to
traditional cruise control. It allows you to
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic
conditions without having to constantly reset your
cruise control. Adaptive Cruise Control uses
radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in your
path, within a distance of 330 ft (100 m), and
operates at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h).
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When it is engaged by the driver, the system can
apply limited braking or acceleration of the vehicle
automatically to maintain a selected follow distance
to the vehicle ahead. Braking is limited to
0.25 g’s (2.45 m/sec2) of deceleration, which is
comparable to moderate application of the vehicle’s
brakes. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control,
apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, the
vehicle will react like traditional cruise control.
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise
Control may not detect a vehicle
ahead. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you. Do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control on winding roads.
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a crash when you are driving in
conditions where vehicles may
{CAUTION:
suddenly slow or stop ahead of you,
enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’s
path. If you are driving in these
conditions, do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control. The warning beep and alert
symbol may indicate that you are
driving in conditions where Adaptive
Cruise Control should not be used. See
“Alerting the Driver” in this section.
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply
hard braking or bring the vehicle to a
complete stop. It will not respond to
stopped vehicles, pedestrians or animals.
When you are approaching a vehicle or
object, Adaptive Cruise Control may not
have time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a collision. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you
should be ready to take action and apply
the brakes. For more information, see
CAUTION: (Continued)
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Adaptive Cruise
controls are located on
the steering wheel.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• On slippery roads, fast changes in
tire traction can cause needless
wheel spinning, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as
when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,
Adaptive Cruise Control performance
is limited. There may not be enough
distance to adapt to the changing
traffic conditions. Do not use cruise
control when visibility is low.
The cruise control buttons are located on left side
of the steering wheel.
] (On): This position turns on the system.
+ Resume (Resume/Accelerate): Press this
button to make the vehicle resume to a previously
set speed or to increase the set speed when
Adaptive Cruise Control is already active.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set–: Press this button to set the speed or to
decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With
the Set Button
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel adaptive
cruise control.
{CAUTION:
+GAP (Increase Following Distance): Press this
button to increase the distance between your
vehicle and other vehicles.
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control
switch on when you are not using cruise,
you might hit a button and go into cruise
when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the
Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until
you want to use cruise control.
−GAP (Decrease Following Distance): Press
this button to decrease the distance between your
vehicle and other vehicles.
Adaptive cruise control will not work if the master
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed you will travel if there is no vehicle
detected in your path.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
1. Press the ] (On) button.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET– button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may
immediately apply the brakes if it detects a
vehicle ahead is too close or moving slower
than your vehicle.
Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive
Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET– button and then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. You will now
cruise at the higher speed.
The on symbol is located on the display at the top
of the instrument panel to the right of the driver.
When the on symbol is lit on the display, it
indicates that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
• Press the +RES button. Hold it there until the
desired set speed is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), then release
A message on the DIC will also display when
Adaptive Cruise Control is set. See DIC Warnings
the switch. To increase your set speed in very
small amounts, move the switch briefly to
+RES. Each time you do this, your vehicle set
speed will increase by 1 mph (1 km/h).
Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding traffic
speeds, and weather conditions when adjusting
your set speed.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when
the traction control system begins to limit wheel
spin, the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically
disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS)
page 305. When road conditions allow you to
safely use it again, you may turn the Adaptive
Cruise Control back on.
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the
system determines there is not a vehicle in
front of you. At that point, your vehicle speed will
increase to the set speed.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the plus and minus buttons on the steering
wheel to adjust the follow distance.
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
Press the plus button to increase the distance or
the minus button to decrease the distance.
The first button press will show you the current
follow distance setting on the DIC. Your current
follow distance setting will be maintained until
you change it.
Press the SET– button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the SET– button. Each time you do this, your
set speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) slower.
Resuming a Set Speed
There are six follow distances to choose from. The
follow distance selection ranges from near to far
(one second to two seconds follow time). The
distance maintained for a selected follow distance
will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster
the vehicle speed the further back your vehicle will
follow. Consider traffic and weather conditions
when selecting the follow distance. The range of
selectable distances may not be appropriate for all
drivers and driving conditions. If you prefer to
travel at a follow distance farther than Adaptive
Cruise Control allows, disengage the system
and drive manually.
Suppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at
a desired speed and then you apply the brake.
This will turn off the Adaptive Cruise Control. But
you do not need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, press the +RES button. Adaptive Cruise
Control will be engaged with the previously chosen
set speed.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle,
it will adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain
the follow distance (gap) you select.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alerting the Driver
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive
Cruise Control from operating. See DIC
more information.
The Adaptive Cruise
Control alert symbol is
located on the
display at the top of the
instrument panel to
the right of the driver.
• A malfunction is detected in the system. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239
for more information.
The alert symbol will flash and a warning beep will
sound when driver action may be required. If
Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged, the alert
symbol will flash when:
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In
some cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may
not have time to slow your vehicle enough
to avoid a collision. Be ready to take
action and apply the brakes yourself. See
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a
vehicle too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
20 mph (32 km/h).
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
{CAUTION:
The Vehicle Ahead
symbol is located on
the top of the instrument
panel to the right of
the driver.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not
detect a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise
Control may not have time to slow your
vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Do
not use Adaptive Cruise Control when the
radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning the
System” later in this section.
The Vehicle Ahead symbol will only appear when
a vehicle is detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears
briefly, Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to
vehicles you may see ahead.
Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically slow
your vehicle down when approaching a slower
moving vehicle. It will then adjust your speed to
follow the vehicle in front at the selected follow
distance. Your speed will increase or decrease to
follow the vehicle in front of you but will not
exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,
if necessary. When braking is active, your brake
lights will come on. Braking may feel or sound
different than if you were applying the brakes
yourself. This is normal.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect
and react to stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects ahead of you.
Your vehicle may accelerate toward
objects, such as a stopped vehicle that
suddenly appears after the lead vehicle
changes lanes. Your complete attention is
always required while driving and you
should be ready to take action and apply
the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect
and react to stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects ahead of you.
You could crash into an object ahead of
you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
when approaching stationary or
slow-moving vehicles or other objects.
Low-Speed Deactivation
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control
will begin to disengage. The Driver Alert symbol
will flash and the warning beep will sound.
The driver must take action since Adaptive Cruise
Control will not slow the vehicle to a stop.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive Cruise
Control Override
Curves in the Road
If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use
the accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes. A
message will appear on the DIC. See DIC Warnings
your foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive
Cruise Control will return to normal operation and
be able to apply the brakes, if needed.
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations
in curves, it may respond to a vehicle in
another lane, or may not have time to
react to a vehicle in your lane. You could
crash into a vehicle ahead of you, or lose
control of your vehicle. Give extra
attention in curves and be ready to use
the brakes if necessary. Select an
{CAUTION:
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
If you rest your foot on the accelerator
pedal, the system will not automatically
apply the brakes. You could crash into a
vehicle ahead of you. Do not rest your
foot on the accelerator pedal when using
Adaptive Cruise Control.
Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in
a sharp curve. It may reduce your speed if the
curve is too sharp.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve,
Adaptive Cruise Control could lose track of
the vehicle in your lane and accelerate your
vehicle. When this happens the Vehicle Ahead
symbol will not appear.
Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that
is not in your lane and apply the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally,
provide a driver alert and/or braking that you
consider unnecessary. It could respond to signs,
guardrails, and other stationary objects when
entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Exit Ramps
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of
the vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your
set speed while entering or on highway exit
ramps. You could be startled by this
acceleration and even lose control of the
vehicle. Disengage Adaptive Cruise
Control before entering a highway exit
ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
while entering or on exit ramps.
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle
until it is completely in the lane. Be ready to
take action and apply the brakes yourself.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Adaptive Cruise Control on Hills
and When Towing a Trailer
Erasing Set Speed Memory
When you press the Adaptive Cruise Control
button or turn the ignition off, the set speed
memory is erased.
Other Messages
There are three additional messages that may
appear on the DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR
CRUISE, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and
CLEAN RADAR. These messages will appear to
indicate a problem with the Adaptive Cruise
page 239 for more information.
How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills
and when towing a trailer depends on your vehicle’s
speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions and the
steepness of the hills. It may not detect a vehicle in
your lane while driving on hills. When going up
steep hills, you may want to use the accelerator
pedal to maintain your vehicle’s speed. When going
downhill, especially when towing a trailer, you may
want to brake to keep your speed down. Applying
the brake disengages the system. You may choose
not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills,
especially when towing a trailer.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or
dirt. If so, you may need to turn off the engine and
clean the lens. Remember, do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control in icy conditions, or when visibility is
low, such as in fog, rain or snow.
The emblem/lens is located in the center of
the grille.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a
soft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try to
engage the Adaptive Cruise Control. If you
are unable to do so, see your dealer.
To turn off the system, apply the brake pedal,
press the cancel button, or press the Adaptive
Cruise Control button.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): This position automatically
turns on the headlamps at normal brightness,
together with the following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• IntelliBeam™
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps
control is located on
the instrument panel
to the left of the
steering wheel.
;(Parking Lamps): This position turns on the
parking lamps together with the following:
• Instrument Panel Lights
• License Plate Lamps
• Taillamps
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Side Marker Lamps
• Taillamps
The parking brake indicator light comes on and
stays on while the parking lamps are on with the
engine off and the ignition in ACCESSORY or RUN.
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Fog Lamps
2(Headlamps): This position turns on the
headlamps together with the previously listed
lamps. A warning chime sounds if you open the
driver’s door when the ignition switch is off and the
headlamps are on.
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
O (Off): This position turns off the exterior lamps
except for Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
-(Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps control
page 191.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™
IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
Press and release the IntelliBeam™ button on
the inside rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam™
indicator on the mirror turns on to indicate
the system is on. Once the system has been
turned on, it remains on each time the vehicle is
started, but the IntelliBeam system must
be enabled.
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read
this entire section before using it.
IntelliBeam™ is an enhancement to your
vehicle’s headlamp system. Using a digital light
sensor on your rearview mirror, this system
turns the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps on and
off according to surrounding traffic conditions.
To enable the IntelliBeam™ system, turn the
exterior lamp control to AUTO, with the
turn signal/multifunction lever in its neutral
position. The High-Beam On Light appears
on the instrument panel cluster when the high-
beams are on. See Highbeam On Light
on page 231.
The IntelliBeam™ system turns the high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no
other traffic present, and the IntelliBeam system
is enabled.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with IntelliBeam™
• If IntelliBeam™ was using low-beams prior to
this action, the IntelliBeam™ feature is
temporarily disabled until the stalk is returned
to the neutral position.
IntelliBeam™ only activates the high-beams when
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the
automatic control of IntelliBeam™, until any of
the following situations occur:
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any
setting except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam™ is disabled
until the control is turned back to the
AUTO position.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle’s headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding
vehicle’s taillamps.
• The IntelliBeam™ system is turned off at the
inside rearview mirror.
• The outside light is bright enough that
high-beam headlamps are not required.
IntelliBeam™ might not turn off the high-beams if
the system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps
because of any of the following:
• The vehicle’s speed drops below
15 mph (24 km/h).
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing,
damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise
undetected.
• The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the
high-beam position or the flash-to-pass
feature is used. See Headlamp
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with
dirt, snow, and/or road spray.
When either of these conditions occur, the
IntelliBeam™ feature is disabled and the
IntelliBeam™ light in the mirror turns off until
the high-beam stalk is returned to the
neutral position.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected
due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road
spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™ at
the Rearview Mirror
IntelliBeam™ can be disabled by using the
controls on the inside rearview mirror.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, or
obstructed by something that blocks the view
of the IntelliBeam™ light sensor.
AUTO 3 (On/Off): To disable the system,
press this button on the inside rearview mirror.
The IntelliBeam™ indicator turns off and does not
come back on until the IntelliBeam™ button is
pressed again.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice,
dirt, haze, or other obstructions.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end
of the vehicle points upward, causing the
IntelliBeam™ sensor to aim high and
not detect headlamps and taillamps.
When IntelliBeam™ has turned on the high-beams,
pull or push the high-beam stalk. This will disable
IntelliBeam™. The IntelliBeam™ indicator on the
mirror turns off. To turn IntelliBeam™ back on,
press the IntelliBeam™ button on the mirror.
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
You might need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding
this button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam™
indicator light flashes three times. If you
accidentally activate this, the vehicle’ s setting
automatically is reset when the ignition is turned
off and then on again.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp
control is left on in either the headlamp or parking
lamp position and the driver’s door is opened
with the ignition off.
The light sensor is
located on the inside of
the vehicle in front of the
inside rearview mirror.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the turn signal
lamps come on when the following conditions
are met:
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using
glass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the
sensor window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the surface of the sensor window.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is in the off position.
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers are turned
on and have completed eight wipe cycles within
four minutes.
• The transaxle is not in PARK (P) (United
States only).
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the
wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off.
The wiper-activated headlamps also turn off if the
windshield wipers are turned off.
• The light sensor is covered or not detecting
light. See “Sensors” under Dual Climate
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps such
as the parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be
on when the DRL are being used. Your instrument
panel will not be lit up either.
Turning on automatic lighting or the headlamps
will deactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or the
fog lamps were turned on instead, the DRL will
still deactivate.
When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enough
outside, the turn signal lamps will turn off and
normal low-beam headlamp operation will occur.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn
off automatic lighting and shift the transaxle
into PARK (P). Placing your vehicle in PARK (P)
disables the DRL. The DRL will stay off until
you shift out of PARK (P).
When automatic lighting is on and it is bright
enough outside, the regular lamps will go off, and
the DRL will take over. If you start your vehicle
in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system
will come on immediately. Once you leave the
garage, it will take approximately one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL
if there is light outside. During that delay, your
instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as
usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
knob is in the full bright position. See Instrument
To drive your vehicle with the DRL off, turn off
automatic lighting and manually turn on the parking
lamps or fog lamps (if equipped).
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or
misty conditions.
- (Fog Lamps): The fog lamps button is
located on the exterior lamps control. The exterior
lamps control is located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you press the exterior lamps control, the fog
lamp lights on the instrument panel cluster will
come on to indicate that the fog lamps and
the parking lamps are on.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have
been left on, the exterior lamps will turn off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned to OFF. This protects against draining the
battery in case you have accidentally left the
headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver
does not work if the headlamps are turned on
after the ignition switch is turned to OFF.
Press the button again to turn them off.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog
lamps will turn off. They will turn back on again
when you switch to low-beam headlamps.
When automatic lighting is on and the fog lamps
are turned on, the fog lamps, headlamps and
parking lamps will remain on.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to
turn the lamps back on.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps
to operate.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
D(Instrument Panel Brightness): This
feature controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps come on when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on and you
signal a turn with the multifunction lever. They
provide more light for cornering.
The button for this control is located below the
exterior lamps control.
Push the button in and release to extend the
button. Turn the button clockwise for brightness of
the instrument panel lights and counter clockwise
to turn the brightness down.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Lamps
Parade Dimming
The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner
above the rear seat. These lamps come on by
turning the instrument panel brightness knob fully
clockwise or when any door is opened and it is
dark outside. Puddle lamps are located on
the bottom of the front and rear door trim.
This feature prohibits dimming of the digital
displays and backlighting during daylight hours
when the key is in the ignition and the headlamps
are on. This feature is fully automatic. When
the light sensor reads darkness outside and the
parking lamps are active, the digital displays
can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel
brightness knob counterclockwise to dim and
clockwise to brighten lighting.
Professional vehicles have an additional dome
lamp and also opera lamps.
Entry Lighting
Reading Lamps
This feature turns on the courtesy lamps and the
backlighting to the door switches and to the exterior
lamp control when a door is opened or if you press
the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button.
If activated due to the transmitter, the lighting will
remain active for about 40 seconds. Since the entry
lighting system uses the light sensor, it must be
dark outside in order for the courtesy lamps to turn
on. The courtesy lamps turn off approximately
25 seconds after the last door is closed. They will
dim to off if the ignition key is turned to RUN, or
immediately deactivate if the power locks are
activated.
The reading lamps are located on the overhead
console on the headliner and in the rear door
opening. These lamps come on automatically
when any door is opened and it is dark outside.
For manual operation, press the button to
turn them on. Press it again to turn them off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically
shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned off.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Load Management
Electric Power Management
The battery load management feature is
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
designed to monitor the vehicle’s electrical load
and determine when the battery is in a heavy
discharge condition. During times of high electrical
loading, the engine may idle at a higher
revolutions per minute (rpm) setting than normal to
make sure the battery charges. High electrical
loads may occur when several of the following are
on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear
window defogger, the climate control fan at high
speeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltage
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some
electrical loads will automatically be reduced.
When this occurs, the rear window defogger may
take slightly longer to clear the glass, the
heated seats may not get as warm as they usually
do and the climate control fan may cut back to
a lower speed. For more battery saving
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for all
vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)
may not be spinning fast enough at idle to
produce all the power that is needed for very
high electrical loads.
information, see “Battery Saver Active Message”
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s
battery against drainage from the interior lamps,
trunk lamp, glove box lamp, or the garage door
opener. When the ignition is turned off, the power to
these features will automatically turn off after
10 minutes. Power will be restored for an additional
10 minutes if any door or trunk is opened, or the
courtesy lamp switch is turned on.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the
battery from being drained, if the interior courtesy
lamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps
or trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If any
of these lamps are left on, they will automatically
turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.
The lamps will not come back on again until
one of the following occurs:
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action, this action may
be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver
Information Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Service
Battery Charging System. If this message is
displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
• The ignition is turned on.
• The exterior lamps control is turned off, then
on again.
The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they
are manually turned on before the ignition is off.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA)
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is equipped, the Ultrasonic Front and
Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) system is designed
to help you park. It operates only at speeds less
than 5 mph (8km/h). UFRPA helps make parking
easier and helps you avoid colliding with objects
such as parked vehicles. The UFRPA system
detects objects that are close to the vehicle which
are at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground and
below hood or trunk level. The system detects
objects up to 4 feet (1.2 m) in front of the vehicle
and up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle.
UFRPA determines how close these objects are
from your bumpers within this area. Four ultrasonic
sensors on the front and rear bumpers are used to
detect the distance to the object.
The Ultrasonic Front and Rear Park
Assist (UFRPA) system does not replace
driver vision. UFRPA does not:
• Operate above speeds of
5 mph (8 km/h).
• Detect objects more than 4 feet
(1.2 meters) in front of the vehicle and
more than 8 feet (2.5 meters) behind the
vehicle. This distance may be less
during warmer or humid weather.
• Detect objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the vehicle, or that
are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
or pets.
So if you do not use proper care before
moving forward or backing up, you could
hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist, or
CAUTION: (Continued)
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The front display is located on top of the
instrument panel to the right of the driver. The rear
display is located near the rear window and can
be seen by looking over your right shoulder.
The rear display has three color-coded lights. The
front display will have either three or six lights
depending on whether your vehicle is equipped
with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). If your vehicle
has ACC, it will have three lights along with the
ACC lights. If your vehicle does not have ACC, it
will have six UFRPA lights. The UFRPA lights
are used to provide distance and system
CAUTION: (Continued)
pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, or
death. Even though the vehicle has the
UFRPA system, always check carefully
before moving forward or backing up by
checking in front of and behind your
vehicle.
information, along with beeps played out either the
front or rear speakers. For objects detected
near the front bumper, high-toned beeps will be
played out the front speakers. For objects detected
near the rear bumper, low-toned beeps will be
played out the rear speakers.
Rear Parking
Assist Display
Front Parking
Assist Display
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UFRPA first comes on, the following describes what
will occur according to your distance from an object
located in front of the vehicle:
How the System Works
When the vehicle is started, the front display will
briefly illuminate to let you know the display is
operating correctly. When the shift lever is moved
into REVERSE (R), the rear display will briefly
illuminate to let you know the display is operating
correctly. UFRPA comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).
The system does not work at a forward speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), so the front display
indicators are turned off. The system also
does not work at a reverse speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this, the red light
on the rear display will flash.
• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and 4 ft
(1.2 m), two amber lights will be lit. If you have
Adaptive Cruise Control, a single amber light
will be lit.
• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and
40 inches (1 m ), four amber lights will be lit. If
you have Adaptive Cruise Control, two amber
lights will be lit.
• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and
23 inches (0.6 m), all six lights (four amber
lights/two red lights) will be lit. If you have
Adaptive Cruise Control, all three lights
(amber/amber/red) will be lit.
The system can be disabled using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and
• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a
chime will sound for a short time and all
six lights (four amber lights/two red lights) will
be lit and flashing. If you have Adaptive Cruise
Control, a chime will sound for a short time and
all three lights (two amber lights/one red light)
will be lit and flashing.
How the System Works when Moving
Forward
When moving forward, the system detects objects
only near the front bumper.
If an object is detected at a forward speed of less
than 5 mph (8 km/h), or if you are already within a
4 ft (1.2 m) distance to a detected object when
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and
23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/
amber/red) will be lit.
How the System Works when Backing
When backing, UFRPA detects objects close to the
front and rear bumpers. The first time an object is
detected a single chime will sound. If an object is
detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of less than
5 mph (8 km/h), or if you are already within an
8 ft (2.5 m) distance to a detected object when the
system first comes on, the following describes what
will occur according to your distance from an object
located behind the vehicle:
• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m),
a chime will sound for a short time and all
three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit
and flashing.
When you are backing the vehicle and objects are
detected at the same time near both the front
and rear bumpers, both color-coded light displays
will notify you of objects close to each bumper.
If there are objects detected near both bumpers,
the beeps will only be sounded to notify that
objects are close to the rear bumper. However, if
while you are backing and an object comes
within 1 ft (0.3 m) of the front bumper, and at the
same time there is another object further than
1 ft (0.3 m) from the rear bumper, then the beeps
will only be sounded to notify you of the closer
object that is near the front bumper.
• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and
8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will be lit.
• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and
40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be lit.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
your next drive, the system will return to normal
unless an object is detected when the vehicle is
shifted out of park. If this occurs, UFRPA will
return to normal operation when the vehicle is
driven forward above 15 mph (25 km/h).
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the UFRPA system will not activate due to a
temporary condition, the message PARKING
ASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC and a red
light will be shown on the rear UFRPA display when
the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). This
occurs under the following conditions:
• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So
be sure to keep your vehicle’s front and rear
bumpers free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your
and rear bumpers and driving forward at a
speed of at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the DIC
displays the PARKING ASSIST OFF message,
see your dealer.
• Other conditions that may affect system
performance include vibrations from a
jackhammer or the compression of air brakes
on a very large truck or other mechanical
devices that interfere with UFRPA
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
bicycle or an object was hanging out of your
trunk during your last drive when you turned off
the vehicle. If the attached objects are removed
from your vehicle before the start of your next
drive, the system will return to normal operation
unless an object is detected when the vehicle is
shifted out of park. If this occurs, you will have
to wait until the vehicle is driven forward above
15 mph (25 km/h) before UFRPA will return to
normal operation.
performance.
• When UFRPA is disabled without driver action
and the driver attempts to turn UFRPA back on
using the Driver Information Center (DIC), the
PARKING ASSIST ON option will not be
selectable if the necessary conditions stated
above for normal system operation are not met.
• A bicycle or an object is attached to the front
bumper during your last drive when you turned
off the vehicle. If the attached objects are
removed from your vehicle before the start of
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As always, drivers should use care when backing
up a vehicle. Always look behind you, being
sure to check for other vehicles, obstructions and
blind spots.
If your vehicle has a stationary center console, the
power outlet is located inside the lower storage
area. There are outlets also on the right front lower
part of the driver’s seat and in the lower storage bin.
For Driver Information Center messages related to
page 239.
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear
seat area located on the door armrests next to
the ashtrays.
If the bumper is damaged, your UFRPA system
may not work properly. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover
it with the protective cap.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlet can be used at
any time.
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory
power outlets. The outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone,
CB radio, etc.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
unplug electrical equipment when not in use
and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the
maximum 20 ampere rating.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
compatible to the accessory power outlet and could
result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you
experience a problem see your dealer for additional
information on the accessory power outlets.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite them
and possibly damage your vehicle. Never put
flammable items in the ashtray.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not use equipment exceeding maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Front Ashtray
With the full floor console, the ashtray is located
below the climate control system. To open, push
down and then release the cover. To clean the
ashtray, push the lip of the ashtray to remove it.
Push the opposite side of the ashtray’s lip to install.
For vehicles without the floor console, pull the tray
located below the climate controls to reveal the
ashtray. The ashtray can be removed by pulling on
the ledge located at the top of the ashtray.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Rear Ashtray
The ashtrays are located on the door armrests. To
use an ashtray, lift the lid.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cigarette Lighter
Analog Clock
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating.
The analog clock is located on the instrument
panel above the radio. The clock is not connected
with any other vehicle system and runs by
itself. To adjust the clock, do the following:
1. Locate the adjustment button directly below
the clock face.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to
advance the clock hands. Holding the
button down will cause the clock to advance
faster. Release the button before you get
to the desired time.
The cigarette lighter is located near the
front ashtray.
Press the lighter all the way in and release it. It
will pop back out by itself once the element
has heated for use.
3. Push and release the button to increase the
time by one minute increments until the
desired time is reached.
Cigarette lighters can be used to provide electrical
power to accessories. See Accessory Power
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle. To avoid
window fogging on rainy and humid days at
temperatures above freezing, run the air
conditioning compressor. Also, it is best to avoid the
use of recirculation mode except when maximum
air conditioning performance is needed for a short
amount of time to avoid exterior odors and fogging.
Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles with Rear
Climate Control
Automatic Operation
AUTO 9 (Automatic Fan): When this position is
selected on the fan control, the system will
adjust the fan speed. If the OnStar® system is
activated when this position is selected, the climate
control fan speed will lower.
AUTO (Automatic Mode):
1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.
2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.
Dual Climate Control System
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable
setting between 68°F (21°C) and 78°F (26°C).
If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or mode
control, the system will automatically control the air
conditioning compressor. The A/C compressor will
run automatically even at cool outside temperatures
in order to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicator
light will be lit when the system is operating
automatically, even at near freezing outside
temperatures. Press the A/C button on the fan
control to turn off the A/C. For improved window
clearing performance in defog or defrost modes, the
A/C compressor will run automatically.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or
cool any faster. In cold weather, the system will
start at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing
cold air into your vehicle until warmer air
is available. The system will start out blowing
air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to
maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed to warm the interior
will depend on the outside temperature
and temperature of the vehicle.
h (AUTO RECIRCULATION): If the AUTO
position is selected on either the fan or mode
control, the system will automatically control the
air inlet to supply fresh outside air or recirculate
the interior air to cool the car faster. The indicator
light on the recirculation button will light whenever
the system switches to recirculation. You may
force outside air by pressing the recirculation
button when the light is lit. For vehicles without
rear climate controls, press the outside air button
to force outside air. The next time AUTO fan
or mode is selected, the air inlet will reset back to
AUTO operation.
4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to
stabilize in order for the system to regulate
automatically. Then adjust the temperature as
necessary to find your comfort setting.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel near the windshield.
For more information on the solar sensor, see
“Sensors” later in this section.
After the vehicle is started, the display will show
the interior temperature settings and the
outside temperature.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
*(Bi-Level): Turn the control to this mode to
direct approximately half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets and most of the remaining
air to the floor outlets. In automatic operation,
cooler air is directed to the upper outlets
and warmer air to the floor outlets.
9 (Fan): Turn the left control either to the left or
right to adjust the fan speed. Turning this
control completely counterclockwise will turn on
the automatic fan operation. Turning this control to
the “O” position will turn the climate control
system off. If the airflow seems low when the fan
speed is at the highest setting, the passenger
compartment air filter may need to be replaced.
page 213.
7(Floor): Turn the control to this mode to direct
most of the air to the floor outlets with some air
directed to the side window outlets and the
windshield.
The mode control can also be used to select the
floor/defog mode. In this mode, the system will
automatically use outside air. If recirculation is
selected, it will only stay on for three minutes to
reduce windshield fogging. Information on
defogging and defrosting can be found later in
this section.
9 (Off): Turn the left control to this position to
turn the entire climate control system off.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following positions using the right control:
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to turn on
the automatic delivery mode operation.
: (Outside Air): Press this button to allow
outside air to come into the vehicle. It is used to
prevent the air inside the vehicle from becoming
too dry. Press this button to turn the outside
air mode on or off. When the button is pressed,
the indicator light will come on. Pressing the
recirculation button will cancel this mode.
F(Vent): Turn the control to this mode to direct
air to the instrument panel outlets.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the PASS button is pressed to turn the
passenger temperature setting off, the driver’s
temperature knob will control the temperature for
the entire vehicle.
?(Recirculation): Press this button to keep
outside air from coming in the vehicle. It is used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering the
vehicle or to help cool the air inside the vehicle
faster. Press this button to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. When the button is pressed,
an indicator light will come on.
AUX: If your vehicle has a rear climate control
system, press this button to turn the rear climate
control fan on for automatic operation. After
the AUX button is pressed, the indicator light will
come on. Press the button again to turn the
auxiliary fan off. See Rear Climate Control
wx (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Press
these buttons next to the fan control to manually
increase or decrease the temperature inside
your vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press the center of the
left control to override the automatic system
and turn the air conditioning system on or off.
When in AUTO, the air conditioning compressor
will come on automatically, as necessary.
wx (Passenger’s Temperature Controls):
Press these buttons next to the mode control to
manually increase or decrease the temperature for
the front passenger. If the passenger’s climate
control system is off, pressing one of these buttons
will turn it on.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while
idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press this
button to turn the passenger’s climate control
systems on or off. The temperature selected by the
front passenger will also control the rear system
air temperature unless the rear seat passengers
select their own comfort setting.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensors
There is also an interior temperature sensor
located next to the steering wheel that measures
the temperature of the air inside your vehicle.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille,
middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar
radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or the
system will not work properly.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor
located behind the front grille. This sensor reads
the outside air temperature and helps maintain the
temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on
the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading
in the displayed temperature.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In order to prevent false temperature readings at
startup, the displayed temperature will not
change until the following occurs:
W (Floor/Defog): Turn the control to this mode
to direct approximately half of the air to the
floor outlets and the remaining air is directed to
the side window outlets and to the windshield.
When you select this mode, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air conditioning
• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 kmh) for
5 minutes.
• Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 kmh) for
2 and a half minutes.
compressor unless the outside temperature is at
or below freezing. The recirculation mode
The climate control system uses the information
from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting
by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and
the air delivery mode. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed
to maintain cool outlet temperatures.
cannot be selected while in the floor/defog mode.
0 (Defrost): Turn the control to this mode to
direct most of the air to the windshield and the side
window outlets. In this mode, the system will
automatically turn off recirculation and run the air
conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. Do
not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are
two modes to clear fog from your windshield.
Use the floor/defog mode to clear the windows
of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use
the defrost mode to remove fog or frost
For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flow
through the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, press
the AUX button on the front climate control system
so that the light is not lit.
from the windshield more quickly.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
For the front outlets, use the thumbwheel located
below each outlet to change the direction of
the airflow. Use the thumbwheel located next to
the outlets to shut the airflow or to open the outlets
and re-direct the air.
< (Rear Defogger): Press the center of the
right control to turn the rear window defogger on or
off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the
rear window as possible. The rear window
defogger will turn off approximately 20 minutes
after the button is pressed if your vehicle is moving
at slower vehicle speeds. At higher vehicle
speeds, the rear defogger may stay on
For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right and
up or down to change the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
continuously. Each additional press will run the
defogger for approximately 10 minutes.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors
may adversely affect the performance of
the system.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to
help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror
when the rear window defogger is on.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions may damage
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the AUX button located on the front climate
control panel is pressed, the rear climate control
system will be turned on. The rear system will
operate in automatic mode and the temperature
settings selected for the front climate control panel
will also be selected for the rear passengers.
Rear Climate Control System
If the rear passenger would like to adjust the
rear climate control system, they can select
a different temperature and a different mode or
fan speed.
Whenever the rear passengers have adjusted
settings on the rear climate control system,
the AUX light is lit on the front climate control
system. The driver can turn off the auxiliary fan
by pressing the AUX button.
If your vehicle has a rear climate-control system,
the rear-seat passengers can use it to adjust
the direction of the airflow, the fan speed and the
temperature for the rear-seating area. This
system also works with the main climate-control
system in your vehicle.
When the front climate control system is turned
off or in defrost mode, the rear climate control
system is turned off. The rear system will turn back
on once another front mode is selected.
For more information on how to use the climate
control system, see Dual Climate Control System
on page 204. For more information on the air
The control panel for this system is located on the
back of the center console.
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
following the front setting temperature, it will no
longer follow changes to the front setting
temperature until the front climate control AUX
button resets it.
Automatic Operation
«A ª (Fan): Press this button until AUTO
appears on the display to place the system
in automatic mode. When automatic operation is
active, the system will automatically control the fan
speed. If in auto fan mode, pressing the up
arrow button will cancel automatic operation and
places the system in manual mode. If in auto
mode, pressing the down arrow will turn the rear
climate control system off.
«N ª (Mode): Press these buttons to change
the air delivery mode. If in AUTO air delivery
mode, pressing the up arrow button will cancel
automatic operation and place the system in
manual mode.
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the upper
outlets.
«N ª (Mode): Press the this button until
AUTO appears on the display to place the system
in automatic mode. When automatic operation is
active, the system will automatically control the
air delivery mode.
% (Bi-Level): This mode directs half the air to
the upper outlets, and the other half to the
floor outlets.
[ (Floor): This mode directs the air to the
floor outlets.
Manual Operation
«A ª (Fan): Press these up or down arrow
For more information on how to use the front
climate control system, see Dual Climate Control
buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed.
«b ª (Temperature): Press these up or down
arrow buttons to increase or decrease the
temperature for the rear seat passengers. Once
the rear setting temperature is altered from
For more information on the air outlets, see Outlet
under the front seats clear of any objects so that the
air inside of your vehicle can circulate effectively.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of
the pollen from the air entering your vehicle.
Like your vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it may
need to be changed periodically. For how often
to change the passenger compartment air
To access the passenger compartment air filter,
do the following:
1. Use a tool to gently pry the cover up. If your
vehicle has tabs that allow you to unlatch the
cover with your fingers, you will not need a
tool for this step.
The access panel for the passenger compartment
air filter is located under the hood near the
windshield, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin
located on the inboard side of the air
3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between
the air filter and the compartment wall on the
outboard side of the vehicle. Then, push
in to flatten the pin holding the air filter
in place. Gently remove the air filter and any
loose debris that may be inside the air
filter compartment.
filter compartment to carefully pry the pin out.
4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you
hear a click. Then, reinstall the push pin and
snap the cover into place.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on when you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly – and even dangerous. So
please get to know your warning lights and gages.
They are a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center
(DIC) that works along with the warning lights
and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 233 for more information.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will
know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need
to know to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h). See “MPH (km)” under
more information.
This gage indicates the
engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works
together with the driver information center.
You can set a Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See
page 233 for more information.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer
installed, the new one will be set to the correct
mileage total of the old odometer.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will sound for several seconds to remind
you and your passengers to buckle your
safety belts. The driver safety belt light will also
come on and stay on for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag
page 77 for more information. The passenger
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled
and the vehicle
This chime and light will
be repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
is in motion.
the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor
the light will come on.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check includes the
airbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the diagnostic module. For more information on the
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the vehicle on. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in
your vehicle, the SERVICE AIR BAG message will
appear on the DIC display. See DIC Warnings
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled
(may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag. A
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag. See Passenger Sensing
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger seat may not have the
protection of the airbags. See Airbag
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the
other part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
When you turn the
engine on, this light will
come on briefly to show
that the generator and
battery charging
systems are working
properly.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.
You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.
To save your battery until you get there, turn off
page 233 for more information.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
engine on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your
parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will
come on when your
engine is started and
may stay on for
several seconds.
That is normal.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
page 334.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the antilock portion of
the brake system. If the red BRAKE light is not
on, you still have brakes, but you do not have
antilock brakes. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 222.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF or
ACCESSORY. If the light comes on when you are
driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the
ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on,
you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is
also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes and there
is a problem with your regular brakes. See Brake
This light will also come on when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will
accompany the light, see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 239
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
information.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should
come on briefly when you turn the ignition
key to RUN. If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
This light will flash for approximately 60 seconds
and then turn on solid if a problem is detected with
the Tire Pressure Monitor system.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
for more information.
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the ignition to RUN.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
For vehicles that
have the StabiliTrak®
system, this warning
light should come
on briefly when the
engine is started.
The traction control
system warning light
should come on briefly
when the engine is
started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, there may be a problem with your
StabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may need
service. When this warning light is on, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time
when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs
for more information.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, there may be a problem with your traction
control system and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the traction control system warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of
time when the system is turned on, your vehicle
needs service. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 303 for more information.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on when
the engine is very hot.
This light will also come on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with
the cooling system. Driving with engine coolant
temperature light on could cause your vehicle
to overheat, see Overheated Engine Protection
It can be used to see when your engine has
warmed up and to make sure your cooling system
is operating properly. If the gage pointer moves
into the shaded area, the engine coolant is too hot
and the engine coolant temperature warning
page 369 for more information.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition,
and emission
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light should come on, as a check to
show you it is working, when the ignition is on
and the engine is not running. If the light
does not come on, have it repaired.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will also come on during a malfunction
in one of two ways:
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases
vehicle emissions and may damage the
emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A
loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is
possible
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of
water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
Here are some things you need to know in order
to help your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Oil Pressure Light
This light will come on
briefly when you start
your engine.
That is a check to be sure the light works. If it
does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will
be there to warn you if something goes wrong.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means
that oil is not flowing through your engine
properly. You could be low on oil and you might
have some other system problem.
{CAUTION:
Security Light
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others could
be burned. Check your oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced.
For information
regarding this light,
see Theft-Deterrent
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set
your cruise control.
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the cruise control is
more information.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are
more information.
Lights On Reminder
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
This light comes
on whenever
the high-beam
headlamps are on.
information.
page 161 for more information.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had
about the fuel gage. All of these situations are
normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong
with the fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how
much fuel is in the tank.
It works only when
the engine is on.
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop
quickly or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank
than the gage indicated. For example, the gage
may have indicated that the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than half
the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear in the Driver Information
Center and a single chime will sound. See
more information.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Controls and Displays
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC
is also used to display warning/status messages.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below
the tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons
are located on the instrument panel, to the left of
the steering wheel.
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) has
different displays which
can be accessed by
pressing the DIC
buttons located on the
instrument panel, to the
left of the steering wheel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
short delay, the DIC will display the information
that was last displayed before the engine was
turned off.
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through
the trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display
Menu Items” following for more information
on these displays.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle
system information and the warning/status
messages. The bottom line of the DIC display
shows the odometer on the left side. The bottom
line of the DIC display also shows a digital
speedometer on the right side.
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to
scroll through the vehicle information displays.
See “Vehicle Information Display Menu Items”
following for more information on these displays.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will
appear on the display. Be sure to take any
message that appears on the display seriously and
remember that clearing the message will only make
the message disappear, not correct the problem.
U Customization: Press this button to scroll
through each of the customization features. See
more information on the customization features.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL RANGE
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain
DIC features and to acknowledge DIC warning
messages and clear them from the DIC display.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you
can drive without refilling the fuel tank. This
estimate is based on the current driving conditions
and will change if the driving conditions change.
For example, if you are driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, the display may read
one number, but if you enter the freeway,
the number may change even though you still
have the same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This
is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than
city driving.
yz Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll
up and down the menu items.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display
menu items can be displayed by pressing the
trip/fuel button:
TRIP A or TRIP B
These displays show the current distance traveled
since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both
odometers can be used at the same time. Each
trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing and holding the set/reset button for a
few seconds while the desired trip odometer is
displayed.
Once the range drops below an estimated
40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will
show FUEL RANGE LOW.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL
LOW message will be displayed. See “FUEL
LEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 239 for more information.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)
TIMER ON/OFF
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You
can record the time it takes to travel from one point
to another. To access the timer, press the
trip/fuel button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button
until TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button
again until TIMER OFF displays. The timer
will stop and display the end timing value.
To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset
button after the timer has been stopped. The
display will return to zero.
This display shows the approximate average miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last
time this display was reset. To reset this display,
press the set/reset button. The display will return
to zero.
INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)
This display shows the current fuel economy in
either miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number reflects
only the fuel economy that the vehicle has
right now and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average economy, this
display cannot be reset.
AVERAGE SPEED
This display shows the average speed of the
vehicle in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h). This average is calculated
based on the various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this display. To reset
this display, press the set/reset button. The display
will return to zero.
FUEL USED
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this
display. To reset this display, press the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Vehicle Information Display Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): The following
display menu items can be displayed by pressing
the vehicle information button:
This display shows the current battery voltage. If
the voltage is in the normal range, the value
will display. For example, the display may read
BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is
low, the display will show LOW. If the voltage is
high, the display will show HIGH. Your vehicle’s
charging system regulates voltage based on
the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
page 222 for more information.
OIL LIFE REMAINING
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the
estimated oil life remaining. If you see 99% OIL
LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means that
99% of the current oil life remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. You should change the oil as soon as
possible. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance
is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in
If there is a problem with the battery charging
system, the DIC will display a message. See DIC
information.
Blank Display
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, See
will show 100% when the system is reset.
This display shows no information.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNITS
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
This display allows you to select between English
or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC units.
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the vehicle information button until the
DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##
RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information button
again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
PARKING ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allows
the system to be turned on or off. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select
between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system
will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system
will be turned off. The UFRPA system automatically
turns back on after each vehicle start. When the
UFRPA system is turned off and the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will display the
PARKING ASSIST OFF message as a reminder
that the system has been turned off. See DIC
on page 196 for more information.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected
by the system while driving, a message advising
you to check the pressure in a specific tire
will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire
If the tire pressure display shows dashes
instead of a value, there may be a problem with
your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see
your dealer for service.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
on the first transmitter at the same time for
about 15 seconds.
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn
the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
A chime will sound indicating that the
transmitter is matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
5. To exit the programming mode, you must
cycle the key to OFF.
This display allows you to match the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle,
do the following:
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
1. Press the vehicle information button until
RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING
ACTIVE will display.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reducing certain features of the vehicle that you
may be able to notice. At the point that the
features are disabled, this message is displayed. It
means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from
the screen for further use. To clear a message,
press the set/reset button.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing
the message will only make the message
disappear, not the problem.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery
voltage on the Driver Information Center (DIC) by
pressing the trip/fuel button until BATTERY
VOLTAGE is displayed.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the automatic
page 186 for more information.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required
for your vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine
page 457 for more information.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic
page 186 for more information.
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message by clearing it from the display,
you still must reset the engine oil life system
separately. For more information on resetting the
engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the system detects
that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable level. The battery saver system starts
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
CLEAN RADAR
This message displays when the tire pressure in
one of the tires needs to be checked. This
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) system are disabled because the radar
is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your
path. It may also activate during heavy rain or due
to road spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaning
page 173.
message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
which tire needs to be checked. You can receive
more than one tire pressure message at a time. To
read the other messages that may have been
sent at the same time, press the set/reset button.
If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those shown on the
display also shows the tire pressure values for the
front and rear tires by pressing the vehicle
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays whenever the cruise
more information.
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
after a few seconds, this message clears and
the message “SET SPD XX” displays at the
bottom of the DIC. See “SET SPD (Speed)” later
in this section.
information button. See DIC Controls and Displays
on page 233. If the tire pressure is low, the low
tire pressure warning light comes on. See Low Tire
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears
with this message.
If this message continues to appear, have the
system repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible to avoid damage to the engine.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do
not increase the engine speed above normal
page 369 for more information.
This message displays when the driver’s door is
not closed completely. Make sure that the
driver’s door is closed completely.
ENGINE HOT – A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature
engine, the air conditioning compressor
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
safe place in an emergency.
automatically turns off. When the coolant
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at
a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced.
Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine
FOLLOWING GAP
This message displays when the engine has
overheated. Immediately look for a safe place to
pull your vehicle over and turn the engine off
right away to avoid severe engine damage. See
A chime also sounds when this message
is displayed.
This symbol appears with this message.
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
this message displays to show the follow
distance that has been set. There are six follow
distances to choose from. Each follow distance is
shown on the DIC by displaying from one to
six bars between two car symbols. See Adaptive
This message displays when the engine power is
being reduced to protect the engine from
damage. There could be several malfunctions that
might cause this message. Reduced engine
power can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no reduction
in performance, proceed to your destination.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID
WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when you turn on the
heated washer fluid system. See “Heated Washer
for more information.
HOOD OPEN
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A
single chime sounds when this message is
HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF
This message displays when you manually turn
off the heated washer fluid system or when
the system automatically turns off. See “Heated
page 168 for more information.
This message displays when the hood is not
closed completely. Make sure that the hood is
completely closed.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while
This symbol appears
the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine
damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See
with this message.
This message displays when the driver’s side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that
the door is closed completely.
This message displays when the vehicle’s
engine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. See
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS PEDAL
APPLIED
A multiple chime sounds when this message is
more information.
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) is engaged and you are pressing
the accelerator pedal enough to disable ACC
page 173 for more information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage
can result from driving a vehicle with low oil
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible when this message
is displayed.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING ASSIST OFF
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK (P), this message displays to
remind the driver that the UFRPA system has been
turned off. Press the set/reset button to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display. To turn the UFRPA system back on,
see “PARKING ASSIST” under DIC Controls and
more information.
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system will not activate due to a
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require
service. If this message appears when you
attempt to activate the system, continue driving for
several minutes and then try activating the
page 173 for more information.
RAINSENSE WIPERS ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II wipers, this
message displays while this feature is active.
more information.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears
with this message.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
your vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
This message displays when the passenger’s side
front door is not closed completely. Make sure
that the door is closed completely.
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when the battery in
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs
to be replaced. To replace the battery, see
“Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless
This message displays when there is a problem
with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the air delivery mode
door or the electronic sensors that control the
air conditioning and heating systems are no longer
working. Have the climate control system
This symbol appears
with this message.
serviced by your dealer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when the passenger’s side
rear door is not closed completely. Make sure
that the door is closed completely.
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. The charging
system light also displays on the instrument
page 222 for more information. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
This message displays if there is a problem with
the brake system. The brake system warning
light and the anti-lock brake system warning light
may also be displayed on the instrument panel
happens, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is
displayed or appears again when you begin
driving, the brake system needs service. See your
page 379 for more information.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this message
displays if there is a problem with the UFRPA
system. Do not use this system to help you
park. See Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
See your dealer for service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist
This message displays if a problem is detected
with the speed variable assist steering system.
When this message is displayed, you may notice
that the effort required to steer the vehicle
decreases or feels lighter, but you will still be able
to steer the vehicle.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays if the ignition is on to
inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer as
soon as possible.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) system are disabled and need service.
See your dealer.
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability
enhancement system called StabiliTrak®. See
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system programmed in the
key. A fault has been detected in the system
which means that the system is disabled and it is
not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually
restarts; however, you may want to take the
vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine.
more information.
This message displays if there has been a
problem detected with the StabiliTrak® system.
If this message comes on while you are driving,
pull off the road as soon as possible and stop
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the
ignition off then back on. If this message still stays
on or comes back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
StabiliTrak® system inspected by your dealer as
soon as possible.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working
properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of the
four sensors are missing or inoperable, the
warning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensor
would be missing, for example, if you put
different wheels on your vehicle without
transferring the sensors. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the
TPM. See your dealer.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
This message displays when the magnetic
ride control or automatic leveling control system is
not operating properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
few seconds, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH
(km/h)” message clears and the message
“SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the DIC.
See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”
earlier in this section and Adaptive Cruise Control
on page 173 for more information.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when there is a problem
with the Traction Control System (TCS). When this
message is displayed, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See your dealer for service. See Traction Control
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when your vehicle speed is
limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the
vehicle detects a problem in the speed variable
assist steering, magnetic ride control, or automatic
leveling control systems. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem
with the vehicle’s transaxle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message displays when a non-emissions
related malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message may
display and the Traction Control System and
StabiliTrak® Warning Light on the instrument panel
cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle
and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The StabiliTrak® system is not functional until
on page 305 for more information.
SET SPD (Speed)
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
this message displays whenever the cruise
control is set. First, the “CRUISE SET TO
XXX MPH (km/h)” message appears. After a
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tire
positions on your vehicle. See Tire Pressure
must be re-learned after rotating the tires or
after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This symbol appears
with this message.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving
page 303 for more information.
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while
you were away from your vehicle. See Content
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is turned on. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 303
for more information.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message displays when the fuel cap has not
been fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to
ensure that it is on and tightened properly.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays when the transaxle fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and
allow it to idle until the transaxle cools down or
until this message is removed.
This message displays as a reminder to turn off
the turn signal if you drive your vehicle for
more than about 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal
on. A multiple chime sounds when this message
is displayed.
TRUNK OPEN
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This symbol appears
with this message.
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when the trunk is not
closed completely. Make sure that the trunk is
closed completely.
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield
washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible.
more information.
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle has customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to
one preferred setting. Customization features
can only be programmed to one setting on
the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a
preferred setting for two different drivers.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the
feature settings menu.
All of the customization options may not be
available on your vehicle. Only the options
available will be displayed on your DIC.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE
SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display.
Before entering the menu, make sure the
vehicle is in PARK (P).
The customization features were set to the default
settings when your vehicle left the factory, but
they may have been changed from their default
state since that time.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow
you to program settings to the vehicle:
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other
than English has been set. This feature allows you
to change the language in which the DIC
messages appear back to English.
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button to select English as the
language in which all DIC messages will appear.
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in
which the DIC messages will appear.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the menu up/down
button to scroll through the following settings:
This feature allows you to select when the
vehicle’s doors will automatically lock. See
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 100
for more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear
in English.
DEUTSCH (German): All messages will appear
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s
doors automatically lock when the doors are
closed and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
in German.
FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appear
in French.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doors
automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above
5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.
ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appear
in Spanish.
JAPANESE: All messages will appear
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
in Japanese.
feature. The current setting will remain.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to
this feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
feature. The current setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select whether or not
the door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allows
you to select which doors and when they will
automatically unlock. See Programmable
more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
You will not receive feedback when locking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are
open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
Press the customization button until REMOTE
DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door
will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press
the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock
when the key is taken out of the ignition.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when
you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second
Press the customization button until REMOTE
DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the menu up/down
button to scroll through the following settings:
press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press the lock button on
the RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound
when the lock button is pressed again within
five seconds of the previous command.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
feedback you will receive when unlocking the
vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive feedback when
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the
doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. The
locking of the vehicle’s doors is delayed for up to
10 seconds after a power door lock switch is
pressed when a door is open, or after the lock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed while a door is open. The key
must be out of the ignition for this feature to work.
Press the customization button until DELAY
DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors
will be delayed by 10 seconds after a power
door lock switch is pressed when a door is open,
or the lock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed while a door is open.
If it is dark enough outside, this feature allows you
to select the amount of time you want the
exterior lamps to remain on. This happens after
the key is turned from RUN to OFF.
Press the customization button until EXIT
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will
stay on for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
APPROACH LIGHTING
feature. The current setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during
low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level
of the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME
VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the
exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set
to a normal level.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until
the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 92
for more information.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a
loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
PARK TILT MIRRORS
feature. The current setting will remain.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select whether or not the outside mirror(s)
will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
EASY EXIT SEAT
Press the customization button until PARK
TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select your preference for the easy exit seat
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
SEAT appears in the display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted
down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
OFF (default): No seat exit recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat will move back, and if the
vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic
steering feature, the power steering column
will move up and forward when the key is
removed from the ignition.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE (R).
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only
occur one time after the key is removed from
the ignition. If the automatic movement has already
occurred, and you put the key back in the
ignition and remove it again, the seat and steering
column will stay in the original exit position,
unless a memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
Press the customization button until MEMORY
SEAT RECALL appears in the display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF (default): No memory seat recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat will automatically move
to the stored driving position when the unlock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select your preference for the memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE START
FACTORY SETTINGS
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn
the remote start feature off or on. The remote
start feature allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle
Start” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
This feature allows you to set all of the
customization features back to their factory
default settings.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE
START appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button
to scroll through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization
features will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features
will not be set to their factory default settings.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
ON (default): The remote start feature will
be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any
of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The ignition is no longer in RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
are pressed.
{CAUTION:
• The end of the feature settings menu is
reached.
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
page 296. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition is
turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 115 for more information.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
Setting the Time (Radio with Single
CD Player)
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio Clock
Your vehicle has an analog clock as well as the
digital radio clock. At the time of new vehicle
delivery, the digital radio clock display should be
disabled. If you decide to use the digital radio clock
as well as the analog clock, you can change the
setting to enable the radio clock display.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way
radio, make sure that it can be added by
checking with your dealer. Also, check federal
rules covering mobile radio and telephone
units. If sound equipment can be added, it is
very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Turn the radio clock display on or off by following
these steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button until the clock and date
setting menus appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
forward arrow label until the menu for
default clock and date settings appear.
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
currently displayed status of either ON or OFF.
The ON display indicates the radio clock
display is disabled and the OFF display
indicates the radio clock display is enabled.
Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio clock
display on or off.
Setting the Time and Date on the Digital
Radio Clock
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player,
it has a clock button for setting the time and
date. To set the time and date, do the following:
1. Turn the radio on.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the
screen displays Radio Clock ON for
10 seconds, then returns to the original
clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the
screen displays Radio Clock OFF for
10 seconds. The menus for clock and date
settings are removed, and ON displays
as a current status indicating that the clock
display can be turned on, if desired.
2. Press the clock button and HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under each
one of the labels that you want to change.
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,
the time or the date if selected, increases
by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD
(forward) button.
The radio clock and analog clock are not
synchronized. Occasionally you may need to set
the digital radio clock using the procedure below to
synchronize both clocks.
4. To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio faceplate,
to adjust the selected setting.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Setting
Setting the Time (Radio with
Six-Disc CD Player)
To change the time and date default setting, do
the following:
Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio Clock
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour
to 24 hour or the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, by
pressing the clock button.
Your vehicle has an analog clock as well as the
digital radio clock. At the time of new vehicle
delivery, the digital radio clock display should be
disabled. If you decide to use the digital radio clock
as well as the analog clock, you can change the
setting to enable the radio clock display.
2. Once the clock and date settings are
displayed along with the forward arrow, press
the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow until the time 12H and 24H, and
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month,
and year) displays.
Turn the radio clock display on or off by following
these steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button until the clock label
display appears.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option, then press the clock button
again to apply the selected default, or let the
screen time out.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the clock
label until the clock and date settings appear.
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
forward arrow label until the menu for
default clock and date settings appear.
Setting the Time and Date on the Digital
Radio Clock
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player,
it has a MENU button for setting the time and date.
To set the time and date, do the following:
5. Press the pushbutton located under the
currently displayed status of either ON or OFF.
The ON display indicates the radio clock
display is disabled and the OFF display
indicates the radio clock display is enabled.
Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio clock
display on or off.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button until the clock option
is displayed.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the clock
label and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the
screen displays Radio Clock ON for
10 seconds, then returns to the original
clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the
screen displays Radio Clock OFF for
10 seconds. The menus for clock and date
settings are removed, and ON displays
as a current status indicating that the clock
display can be turned on, if desired.
4. Press the pushbutton located under each
one of the labels that you want to change.
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,
the time or the date if selected, increases
by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD
(forward) button.
The radio clock and analog clock are not
synchronized. Occasionally you may need to set
the digital radio clock using the procedure below to
synchronize both clocks.
5. To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio faceplate,
to adjust the selected setting.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Setting
Radio with CD (MP3)
To change the time and date default setting, do
the following:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour
to 24 hour or the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, by
pressing the MENU button.
2. Once the clock symbol displays, press the
pushbutton located under that symbol until
the time and date settings are displayed along
with a forward arrow.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
forward arrow until the time 12H and 24H, and
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month,
and year) displays.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option, then press the MENU
button again to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Playing the Radio
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information. This
system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters
display. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features
to work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has with Speed Compensated Volume (SCV).
When SCV is on, the radio volume automatically
adjusts to compensate for road and wind noise
as you speed up or slow down while driving. That
way, the volume level should sound about the
same as you drive. To activate SCV:
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™
offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channels
including music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather
(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text
information that includes song title and artist name.
A service fee is required in order to receive the
XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;
in the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med
(medium), or High) to select the level of radio
volume compensation. The display times out
after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher
setting allows for more radio volume
1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada at
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR
(438-9677).
compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AudioPilot®: If your vehicle has the Bose®
Premium audio, the system has AudioPilot® noise
compensation technology.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.
To use AudioPilot® press the Automatic Volume
Control screen button to access the AudioPilot®
menu and then press the ON screen button.
AudioPilot® automatically adjusts the volume level
of the audio so that it always sounds the same.
The feature is most effective at lower volume
settings where background noise can be louder
than the audio. At high volume settings there might
be little or no change in the audio level. In some
cases where the noise level changes quickly,
you can hear the audio level changing. This
is normal. For more information on AudioPilot®,
visit www.bose.com.
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio
stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow
to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for three seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
To activate AudioPilot®, do the following steps:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the AUTO
VOLUM label on the radio display.
4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn this
feature on or off.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations
can be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
4(Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information related
to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3
song. A choice of additional information such as:
Channel, Song, Artist, CAT (category) can appear.
Continue pressing the information button to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under any one of the labels and the
information about that label displays.
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
When information is not available,
No Info displays.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is in PARK (P). Tune
to your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle
page 296.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton
is pressed and released, the station that was
set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
setting. The highlighted setting can also be
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD
(forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desired
levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is
weak or has static, decrease the treble.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose® amplified
radio, perform the following steps to setup the
equalization settings:
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
1. Press the Tune knob until the equalization
label displays.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the
tune knob until the tone control labels display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
equalization label to get choices of POP,
ROCK, CTRY (country), TALK, JAZZ,
and CLAS (classical), to display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired setting.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Bose® amplified radio, perform the
following steps to setup the equalization settings:
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the
tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting
can be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,
FWD (forward) or REV (reverse) buttons until the
desired levels are obtained.
1. Press the Tune knob until the DSP (Digital
Signal Processing) label displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP
label to get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, and
Surround, to display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired setting.
To select Surround, press either the fourth or
fifth pushbutton located under the displayed
Surround until Centerpoint displays.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
To return to the manual mode, press the tune
knob. Select either BASS, MID, or TREB and start
to manually adjust the settings by turning the
tune knob.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Rear: Select this screen button to adjust the
audio for the rear seat passengers to receive
the best possible sound quality.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
This feature is used to provide a choice of
four different listening experiences. DSP can be
used while listening to the audio system or a
CD. To change the DSP mode, press the tune
knob until the DSP control label displays. Press the
pushbutton located under the DSP label until
the control labels display. Continue by pressing
the desired button below the control labels on
the display.
• Surround (Centerpoint®): Select this screen
button to enable Bose Centerpoint® signal
processing circuitry. Centerpoint® produces a
full vehicle surround sound listening
experience from a CD, MP3/WMA, or XM
stereo digital audio source and delivers
five independent audio channels from
conventional two channel stereo recordings.
(Not available for AM, FM, or auxiliary
sources.)
For more information on the control label displays,
see the following:
• Norm (Normal): Select this screen button to
adjust the audio for normal mode. This
provides the best sound quality for all seating
positions.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) is only available
on vehicles that have the Bose® Premium
audio system.
• Driv (Driver): Select this screen button to
adjust the audio for the driver to receive
the best possible sound quality.
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM
CAT label.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency displays. Press the CAT button to
display the category labels. Continue pressing
the CAT button until the desired category name
displays. Another way to select a category is to
press the REV (reverse) or FWD (forward)
button until the desired category is selected.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed displays.
2. Press either of the two pushbuttons below the
desired category label to immediately tune to
the first XM™ station associated with that
category.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category is displayed or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the pushbuttons
below the displayed right or left arrows, or
press the right or left SEEK buttons to go to
the next or previous XM™ station within
the selected category.
The radio does not let you remove or add
categories while the vehicle is moving faster
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The CAT button also toggles between compressed
and uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is
present. See “Compressed Audio” later in
this section.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play the track
number displays.
Radio Messages
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 292 for more information.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the track. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within a track.
You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject
the CD. If the CD is not removed, after several
seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into
the player.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD
tracks can be played in random, rather than
sequential order. This feature is not available in
playlist mode. To use random, do the following:
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
1. To play tracks in random order from the
CD that is currently playing, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label.
The random icon displays.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current track, if more than ten
seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is held
or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the CD.
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play. The random icon is no longer
highlighted.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4(Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the track number, elapsed time of
the track, and the time. When the ignition is off,
press this button to display the time (if the
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
clock display is enabled). See “Enabling/Disabling
the Digital Radio Clock” under, Setting the
Time (Radio with Single CD Player) on page 262
Six-Disc CD Player) for more information.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into
the slot, label side up. The player pulls
the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for
five seconds. A beep sounds and Load All
Discs displays.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to
insert the discs. The CD player takes up to
six CDs.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and track number displays when a CD is in
the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux
Input Device Found” displays.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
the track number also displays.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If
the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player and
begins playing.
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 292 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the
eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the
tracks can be played in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc
CD player. To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks in random order from the CD
that is currently playing, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until
Randomize Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current track, if more than ten
seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is
held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the track. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within a track.
You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device
Found” displays.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3
feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playing
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or
later in this section.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If the
radio displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting
the problem.
CD Messages
DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or
the CD ejects, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• The radio system does not support the playlist
format, the compressed audio format, or the
data file format.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
information on driver distraction.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. When connecting an auxiliary device,
the radio automatically detects the device and “Aux
Input Device” displays. The device begins
playing audio over the vehicle speakers. If an
auxiliary device has already been connected, the
device does not begin playing audio until the
radio’s CD/AUX button is pressed.
Using an MP3
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were
recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files
can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates:
32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable
bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album can
display when files are recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
do additional volume adjustments from the
portable device.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
MP3/WMA files. By default the radio reads only
the uncompressed audio and ignores the
MP3/WMA files. Pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed and
uncompressed audio format.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or power it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux Input Device Found” displays.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and
folders, or playlists can cause the player to be
unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
to play a large number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take
up more space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files to read and play.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc can
cause the disc not to function in the player.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
Change playlists by using the previous and next
folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.
An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no file
folders can also be played. If a CD-R contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
and 255 files, the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum cannot be accessed.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension (other file extensions may not work).
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and
then goes to the root folder. When the radio
displays the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a folder.
If the root directory has compressed audio files, the
directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior
to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
are always accessed before root folders or files.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R play in the
following order:
Empty Directory or Folder
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
− Playlists can be changed by pressing the
next and previous folder button, the seek
buttons, or turning the tuner knob.
No Folder
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
When the CD-R contains only compressed files,
the files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions do not display on
a CD-R that was recorded without folders or
playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode has been chosen as the default
display. The new track name displays.
When the CD-R contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down and
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File System and Naming
Playing an MP3
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
the file name without the extension (such
as .mp3) as the track name.
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD
Player), or press the load button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),
label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R
should begin playing.
Track names longer than 22 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
is not displayed.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD-R is
in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts to
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
Preprogrammed Playlists
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files. Playlists must have a file
extension of PLS, M3U, or WPL.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 292 for more information.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous
and next folder buttons, the seek buttons, or
turning the tuner knob. Tracks cannot be changed.
Songs are played sequentially; press the REV
or FWD to reverse or advance through the
currently playing song.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the
eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded
CD with a marking pen.
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on
the CD-R currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3 file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next MP3 file. If either
SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward
through MP3 files on the CD.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
c T(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc
is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R automatically pulls
back into the player and begins playing.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file displays.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an MP3
file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It may take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3
files recorded to the CD-R. The radio might
begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the
background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
begins playing again.
Release this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3
files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD-R or all discs
in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under
the RDM label until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of
the display between the arrows. Once all songs by
that artist have played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R
and begins playing MP3 files by that artist. If you
want to listen to MP3 files by another artist,
press the pushbutton located below either arrow
button. The CD goes to the next or previous artist
in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist displays.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a
six-disc CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press
the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the
Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of
the buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the Back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. Now the album
name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album
begins to play. Once all songs from that album
have played, the player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD-R and begins
playing MP3 files from that album.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device such as
a portable audio player. If a portable audio player
is not connected, “No Aux Input Device
Found” displays.
To exit music navigator mode, press the
button below the Back label to return to normal
MP3 playback.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit
Language Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
XM Not Available
Loading XM
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
No Title Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
XM Theft Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
XM Radio ID
Unknown
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr
XM Not Available
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation/Radio System
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The audio steering
wheel controls could be
different depending
on your vehicles
options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted
at the steering wheel.
They include the
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
following:
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate. If
the radio is removed from your vehicle, the
original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the
radio back to your vehicle.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
x w(Next/Previous): Press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or to the previous preset
radio station.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or previous track.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g(Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and hold
this button to interact with the OnStar® system. If
your vehicle is also equipped with the navigation
system, push this button to initiate voice
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus
button to increase or to decrease the volume.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next
radio station and stay there. The system only
seeks radio stations with strong frequencies.
recognition and say, “OnStar” to enter OnStar®
in this manual for more information.
When the seek arrow is pressed and held for
two seconds, the system scans the radio stations
that are in the selected band. If listening to a
CD, the system advances to the next CD when
multiple discs are inserted.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar®, press this
button to silence the system. Press this button
again or turn the volume knob to turn the sound on.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the index of your vehicle’s
If you have the navigation system, some of the
audio steering wheel controls work when a DVD is
playing in the navigation radio. See the Navigation
System manual for more information.
navigation system manual for more information.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between AM, FM, or XM (if equipped), radio,
or CD.
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM Stereo
Radio Reception
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If
there is interference or static, unplug the item from
the accessory power outlet.
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of XM signal for a period of time. The
radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate
interference.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations will boost the power levels during
the day, and then reduce these levels during
the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the
treble on your radio.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with
your vehicle’s radio. This interference may
occur when making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone’s battery, or simply having the
phone on. This interference is an increased
level of static while listening to the radio. If static
is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
Care of the CD Player
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players
because the lens of the CD optics can become
contaminated by lubricants.
Care of Your CDs
Backglass Antenna
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The AM-FM antenna is located in the rear window.
Make sure that the inside surface of the rear
window is not scratched and that the grid lines on
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surface
is damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some
tinting materials will interfere with or distort the
incoming radio reception. Any damage caused
to your antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage
the rear window antenna and/or the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not clear the
inside rear window with sharp objects.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear
window defogger is turned on, it could mean that
a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this
is true, the grid line must be repaired.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of
the XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof
is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached
to the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged. Make sure
the cellular telephone antenna does not touch a
grid line.
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up
with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person
would reach the same BAC by drinking three
4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of
liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of body
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body
water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same
body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might
be less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in
an emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or
always decrease stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have
time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly
slows or stops. Always leave enough room up
ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that the front wheels are spinning too much or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power (by closing the throttle and managing engine
spark) to limit wheel spin.
The traction control system and StabiliTrak®
warning light will flash when the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control
information. You may feel or hear the system
working, but this is normal.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message,
the traction control system warning light and
the StabiliTrak® warning light will come on to let
you know if there is a problem with the traction
control system. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 239.
Magnetic Ride Control
Your vehicle may have a feature called Magnetic
Ride Control that automatically adjusts the
ride of your vehicle. Automatic ride control is
achieved through a computer used to control and
monitor the suspension system. The controller
receives input from various sensors to determine
the proper system response. If the controller
detects a problem within the system, the DIC will
display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message.
for more information. If this message appears,
have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL message are on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you
can turn the traction control system off if you ever
need to.
Electronically Controlled Air Ride
Suspension
You can turn the system on or off at any time by
pressing the traction control system button located
on the console or on the end of the column
shifter. The DIC will display TRACTION CONTROL
OFF when you press the button.
If you have a Cadillac Professional Vehicle, you
may have a feature called Electronically Controlled
Air Suspension. Air ride control is achieved through
a computer used to control and monitor the system.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The controller receives input from two height
sensors to determine the proper system response.
If the controller detects a problem with the system,
the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. If this
message appears, have your vehicle serviced at
your dealership.
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed in the DIC and the traction control system
and StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will be on after first driving the vehicle
and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The StabiliTrak® system is off until the light has
turned off. This could take up to 15 minutes.
The traction control system and StabiliTrak®
warning light on the instrument panel cluster will
flash when the system is operating. See Traction
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have this feature. The
StabiliTrak® system is an advanced computer
controlled system that helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. This is accomplished by selectively
applying any one of the vehicle’s brakes and
reducing engine power.
The StabiliTrak® system comes on automatically
whenever you start your vehicle. The system
cannot be turned off.
page 225 for more information. You may also feel
or hear the system working. This is normal.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be
displayed and the traction control system
and StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on if there is a problem with
the system. When this light and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message are on, the system is not
operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering System
This system continuously adjusts the effort you
feel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides
ease when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at
highway speeds.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle may have a panic brake assist
system that monitors the intention of the driver
while braking. If the system senses that the driver
has applied hard/fast pressure to the brake
pedal, the system will generate additional
pressure, making it easier for the driver to maintain
brake application. When this happens the brake
pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the
brake pedal down firmly and let the system work
for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or
you may notice some noise but this is normal.
The brakes will return to normal operation after
the brake pedal has been released.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface,
the angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease
up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may be
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want to go
slower.
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement
edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead,
then goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below
the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle
straddles the edge of the pavement.
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So here are some tips for passing:
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right
lane and do not get too close. Time your move
so you will be increasing speed as the time
comes to move into the other lane. If the way
is clear to pass, you will have a running
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
start that more than makes up for the distance
you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel
your pass, you need only slow down and drop
back again and wait for another opportunity.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane.
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember that your vehicle’s passenger side
outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just
passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
control system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may be
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They may
not work as well in a quick stop and may
cause pulling to one side. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction.
It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
lightly until your brakes work normally.
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow
down before you hit them.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through your engine’s air intake and
badly damage your engine. Never drive through
water that is slightly lower than the underbody
of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep
puddles or standing water, drive through them
very slowly.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can
if your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warning
signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
City Driving
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially
careful when you pass another vehicle.
Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and
be prepared to have your view restricted by
road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
• Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light
turns green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think
you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is
slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh — such as
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out.
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, you will find experienced and able
service experts in GM dealerships all across
North America. They will be ready and willing to
help if you need it.
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
and your instruments frequently.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
320
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can
climb the hill better.
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,
some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a
flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective
warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under
severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,
a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your trunk.
322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. Even though
your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), you will want to slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain
conditions, you may want to turn the TCS off, such
as when driving through deep snow and loose
gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at
lower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 303.
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must.
This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting the
transaxle back and forth, you can destroy the
transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get
For information about using tire chains on your
326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around the front wheels. You should
turn the traction control system off. See Traction
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause
a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that
does not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it
may need to be towed out. If your vehicle does
page 334.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires
page 402.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire and
Loading Information label specific to your vehicle
will be provided and installed by the final body
manufacturer. The Tire and Loading Information
label, should be attached to the B-pillar of
your vehicle. See the final stage manufacturer’s
manual or contact them directly. The label
shows the original tires installed on your
professional vehicle and the recommended cold
tire inflation pressures for those tires. The
label also tells you the professional vehicle’s
capacity weight.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” for important information on towing
a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
Occupant Weight
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. This label shows
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
for either the front or rear axle.
B
C
Occupant Weight
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the
vehicle specific Certification label is provided by
the final stage manufacturer. The coach-builder
should be consulted if the final stage
manufacturer’s label is not present. The Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR label should be on
the driver’s door edge.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. See “Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit” earlier in this section.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level
as the load changes. It is automatic, you do
not need to adjust anything.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well
as better handling under a variety of passenger
and loading conditions. An air compressor
connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower
the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle
height. The system is activated when the
ignition key is turned to RUN and will automatically
adjust vehicle height thereafter. The system
may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to ten
minutes after the ignition key has been turned
to OFF. You may hear the air compressor
operating when the height is being adjusted.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towing
following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you will want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
334
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly
Towing” later in this section for more information.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow
your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify
the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. Trailering
Towing a Trailer
The Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a
trailer.
is different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you
have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate
at relatively higher speeds and under greater
loads, generating extra heat. What is more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
If You Do Decide To Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you will be driving.
A good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg). These are total maximum weights
including the load. But even that can be too heavy.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle
is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used
to pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your
vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps your engine and other parts
of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a
trailer. Do not drive faster than the maximum
posted speed for trailers, or no more than
55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your
vehicle’s parts.
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at our
Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer
information.
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if
you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
page 327 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right simply by moving some
items around in the trailer.
338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You will find these numbers on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. See
you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes
separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety
chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the
bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you will need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not
intended for hitches. Do not attach rental
hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.
Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not
attach to the bumper.
Trailer Brakes
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not
try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake
system. If you do, both brake systems will not
work well, or at all.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body
of your vehicle when you install a trailer
hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes
later when you remove the hitch. If you do
not seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.
and water can, too.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the
trailer brakes so you will be able to maintain
them properly.
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead
when you are towing a trailer. And, because
the vehicle is a good deal longer, you will need to
go much farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and
platform, parts and attachments, safety chains,
electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start
your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
Making Turns
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs
on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It is important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
Driving on Grades
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer will
not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
do not shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and
no longer work well.
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce
your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.
Check with your dealer. The arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a
turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you
are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here is how to do it:
Parking on Hills
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
2. Have someone place chocks behind the
trailer wheels.
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift
into PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking
brake.
5. Release the regular brakes.
342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you are pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
Schedule for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are
automatic transaxle fluid (do not overfill), engine
oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and
the Index will help you find them quickly. If you
are trailering, it is a good idea to review this
information before you start your trip.
• Start your engine,
• Shift into a gear, and
• Make sure the parking brake has released.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat
during severe operating conditions. See Engine
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
344
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
346
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and
stability control. Some of these accessories may
even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle
all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these
marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement
and function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
CAUTION: (Continued)
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt
any vehicle maintenance task.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
page 82.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 470.
CAUTION: (Continued)
348
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. You may also use
regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may be
slightly reduced, and you may notice a slight
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as
spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you may
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
damage your engine. If you are using gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important
part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
To help keep your engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, GM recommends
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines
may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors recommends
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this
fuel is not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that
is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your dealer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines
may be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
350
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the center
of the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if the cap is released too soon, it will spring
back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
if the fuel cap is not properly installed. See
more information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open
the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can
happen if your tank is nearly full, and is
more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to
stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow
of fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
to get the right type. Your dealer can get
one for you. If you get the wrong type, it
may not fit properly. This may cause your
malfunction indicator lamp to light and may
damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while
it is in your vehicle. Static electricity
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with
the inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
354
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To lift the hood, use the following steps:
1. Pull the hood
release lever with
this symbol on
it. It is located
on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find
the secondary hood release lever, located
near the center of the hood. Move the release
lever up and to the right to raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps
are on properly. Then pull the hood down
and close it firmly.
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
J. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Cap and Dipstick
(Out of View). See Automatic Transaxle
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See Engine
When to Add Engine Oil
on page 356 for the
location of the engine
oil fill cap.
Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove it.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, you will need to add at least
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range in the
cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the
proper operating range, the engine could
be damaged.
358
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil
container, and use only those oils that are identified
as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the
starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection
for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people who
will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system. It is also important to check
the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
360
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes back on when you start your vehicle, the
engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat
the procedure.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime the oil is changed, reset the
What to Do with Used Oil
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message in the Driver Information
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may
be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very
long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly
dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine
oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.
Center (DIC) being turned on, reset the system.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message must be reset.
To reset the message, do the following:
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or a
local recycling center for help.
1. Turn the key to the RUN position without
starting the engine.
2. Press the INFO button on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) until OIL LIFE
REMAINING is displayed. See DIC Controls
3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until
100% is displayed. This resets the oil life
indicator.
4. Turn the key to OFF.
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.
more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Loosen and remove the two screws on the
top of the engine air cleaner/filter cover.
2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an
angle while pulling toward you. This is
necessary due to the two hinges located on
the inboard side of the cover.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the
filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the
filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
362
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element
and any loose debris that may be found in the
air cleaner base.
{CAUTION:
4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Follow these steps to reinstall the cover to the
engine air cleaner/filter housing:
1. Align the two hinges located on the inboard
side of the cover.
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the
engine to engage the tabs in the hinges and
align the two screws.
3. Tighten the two screws on the top of the
engine air cleaner/filter housing cover.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too
little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
the transaxle fluid.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be
at normal operating temperature, which is
180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
364
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait
three seconds, and then pull it back
out again.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare you vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to
five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The transaxle fluid cap is located next to the
radiator hose and below the engine air cleaner/filter
assembly on the driver’s side of the vehicle, and is
marked TRANS FLUID. See Engine Compartment
location.
1. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter
assembly to reach the transaxle fluid cap, turn
the cap counterclockwise to remove. Pull out
the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read
the lower level. The fluid level must be in
the cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way and
turn the handle clockwise. Reinstall the engine
air cleaner/filter assembly.
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years
or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever
occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the
proper fluid to bring the level into the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
• Giving freezing protection down
to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the
handle clockwise.
366
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core, or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at the first
maintenance service after each 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs
first. Any repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)
coolant in your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
With plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would not
get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
{CAUTION:
If you have to add coolant more than two times a
year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed
in this manual for the cooling system.
on page 467 for more information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant
surge tank is located
toward the rear of
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at the FULL COLD mark, located on the side of
the surge tank that faces the engine.
For more information on location, see Engine
368
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant
surge tank, but only when the engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not
spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
You will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED
STOP ENGINE message displayed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
information. You will also hear a chime.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure to
turn the cap until it clicks.
There is also an engine temperature warning light
and/or gage on the instrument panel cluster.
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. See
on page 371 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open
the hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant
message, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam,
the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
370
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it safe to
do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
is displayed, an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a
loss in power and engine performance. This
operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. Driving extended
miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat
protection mode should be avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest
heat setting and fan speed and open the
windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning,
you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not
come back on, you can drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss, change the oil and reset the oil life
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and
park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
on driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner,
at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant
is visible but the level is not at the FULL COLD
mark located on the side of the surge tank,
add enough of a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank to bring the level to the FULL COLD
mark, but be sure the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
374
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove
the coolant surge
tank pressure cap
when the cooling
system, including the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant
and the proper coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant
surge tank with the
proper mixture
4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out
for the engine cooling fans.
to the FULL COLD
mark on the
side of the coolant
surge tank.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level
is lower, add more of the proper mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the FULL COLD mark on the side of the
coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the cap. Be sure the cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar
376
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
The power steering
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
fluid reservoir is located
next to the underhood
fuse block on the
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
on page 356 for
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
more information
on location.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring
the level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak
in the system or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If
you will be operating your vehicle in an area where
the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message
will be displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the fluid is low. See DIC
information.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See
Overview on page 356
for reservoir location.
378
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your linings are worn, then you
will have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is done on
the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
on page 356 for
{CAUTION:
reservoir location
and access.
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid,
it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could be
damaged. Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have your
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well,
or will not work at all.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message will be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and
the area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 435.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
380
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Pedal Travel
{CAUTION:
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work
well together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace
parts of your braking system — for example, when
your brake linings wear down and you need new
ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that
has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an
ACDelco® replacement battery.
A battery that is not properly vented
can let sulfuric acid fumes into the area
under the rear seat cushion. These fumes
can damage your rear seat safety belt
systems. You may not be able to see this
damage, and the safety belts might not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
If a replacement battery is ever needed,
it must be vented in the same manner as
the original battery. Always make sure
that the vent hose is properly reattached
before reinstalling the seat cushion.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion.
To access the battery, see Rear Underseat
access the battery to jump start your vehicle.
382
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep
your battery from running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
around a battery without getting hurt.
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached,
the vent hose connectors (B) must be securely
reattached to the vent outlets (C) on each side of
the battery, and the vent assembly grommet (D)
must be secured to the floor pan (E).
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not
a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to
jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles
rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both
vehicles involved in the jump start procedure.
384
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or
a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps
that are not needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries. And it could
save the radio!
4.6L LD8 Engine shown,
4.6L L37 Engine
similar
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in
the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. Lift the red plastic
cap to access the terminal. See Engine
information on the location of the remote
positive (+) terminal.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations on the
other vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) jump starting terminal and
A second remote positive (+) terminal is
located on the rear underseat fuse block.
a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal.
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located
behind the power steering pulley, near
the engine cover. It is marked GND (−).
{CAUTION:
You will not see the battery of your vehicle
under the hood. It is located under the
rear passenger’s seat. You will not need to
access the battery for jump starting. The
remote terminals are for that purpose.
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle. But
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
do not, explosive gas could be present.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
386
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
remote positive (+) terminal location on
the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal location of the
vehicle with the good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable
to the negative (−) terminal location of the
vehicle with the good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end of the cable touch
anything until the next step. The other end of
the negative (−) cable does not go to the
dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)
or you will get a short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal location
on the vehicle with the dead battery.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries,
it probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected
or removed in the wrong order, electrical
shorting may occur and damage the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always connect and remove
the jumper cables in the correct order, making
sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
388
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are
aimed properly, read all the instructions before
beginning. Failure to follow these instructions
could cause damage to headlamp parts.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps
are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover
to its original position.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a level
surface which is level all the way to the wall.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is
perpendicular to the wall.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or
mud on it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all
other work stopped while headlamp aiming is
being performed.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs
(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• The spare tire is in its original location in
the vehicle.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory
and should need no further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,
the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at
you, this may also mean the vertical aim needs to
be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described in the following procedure.
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s
low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps
will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps
are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
page 355 for more information.
4. At the wall measure from the ground
upward (A) to the recorded distance
from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle at the wall where it was marked
in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve
beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a
headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place
a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of
the headlamp not being aimed. This should
allow only the beam of light from the headlamp
being aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
2. Find the center line running through the lens
of the headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the
center line running through the lens of the
headlamp. Record the distance.
390
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal
tape line. If you turn it clockwise, it will raise
the beam and if you turn it counterclockwise,
it will lower the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned
at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws.
They are located under the hood near each
headlamp assembly. First lift the flap to
access either of them. Each one is the top
outboard screw by the “ V” on the cover
panel next to the aiming flap.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows
the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
The adjustment screw can be turned with
a 6 mm hex wrench.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced
by your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 457 for more information on wiper blade
inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. Here’s how to
remove the wiper blade:
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Lift the windshield wiper arm and blade away
from the windshield.
The low beam high intensity discharge
lighting system operates at a very high
voltage. If you try to service any of
the system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your dealer or
a qualified technician service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point,
and pull the blade assembly down toward the
windshield to remove it from the wiper arm.
392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm
and firmly press down on the clip to snap it
into place.
To remove and replace the wiper blade element
do the following:
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at
one end which are engaged by the bottom
claw set of the wiper blade. At the notched
end of the wiper blade, pull the wiper
blade element from the wiper blade assembly.
2. To replace the element, start at the heel end
of the wiper blade, which is the end nearest
to the base of the wiper arm, and slide
the wiper blade element, notched end last,
into the wiper blade claw sets.
A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
3. To engage the last claw into the notched end
of the wiper blade element, squeeze the
wiper blade element at the notched area, and
push the wiper blade element so the claw
fits into the notch.
For the proper type and size windshield wiper
blades, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches
are engaged by the last claw set, and that all
the other claws are properly engaged in the
slots of the wiper blade element on both sides.
393
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for
details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
CAUTION: (Continued)
394
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the
Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger Car Tire Example
395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
396
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire
or compact spare tire should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire
pressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Light Truck Tire Example
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
398
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a single.
For information on recommended tire pressure
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
Tire Size
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply
construction.
The following illustration shows an example of a
tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel
in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of
a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 402.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission/
transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
400
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 327.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 411.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
402
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
load your vehicle affects the vehicle handling
and ride comfort, never load your vehicle
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the spare tire. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar. This label lists your
vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
403
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
Professional Vehicle
The proper inflation of the tires on your professional
vehicle depends on the type of tires on it.
• If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires, the
cold inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).
• If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size tires,
the cold inflation pressure depends on the
vehicle mass and should be determined by the
vehicle coach-builder. A tire and loading
information label provided by the final stage
manufacturer should be attached to the
B-pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
If the final stage manufacturer’s label is not
present, the coach-builder should be consulted.
Do not use the tire pressures indicated on the
General Motors label. These tire pressures
are for the incomplete vehicle and are not the
correct tire pressures for the completed
professional vehicle.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) that sends tire pressure
information to the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Using the DIC control buttons, the driver is able
to check tire pressure levels in all four road
page 233 for additional information.
Operation at inflation pressures below this
recommendation may cause your tires to become
overloaded.
404
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18
size tires, and you will be driving at speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal,
set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum
inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or
38 psi (265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the
example following.
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause
sudden tire failure. You could have a
crash and you or others could be killed.
Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can
be driven at high speeds, make sure the
tires are rated for high speed operation,
in excellent condition, and set to the
correct cold tire inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)
300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation
pressure for high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
When you end this high-speed driving, return the
tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See
405
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
display when the vehicle is first started and then
turn off as you start to drive the vehicle. This could
be an early indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and need to be checked and inflated
to the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure
levels. Sensors are mounted on each tire and
wheel assembly, except the spare tire. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
When a low tire pressure condition is detected,
the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure
warning symbol located on the instrument panel
cluster. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message
to check the pressure in a specific tire will also
appear on the DIC display. The low tire pressure
warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster
and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message
on the DIC display will appear at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays
As an added
safety feature, your
vehicle has been
equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when
one or more of your
tires is significantly
under-inflated.
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,
that the low tire pressure warning symbol and
the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will
406
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
A Tire and Loading Information Label, attached
to your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s
original tires and the correct inflation pressure
for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.
location of the Tire and Loading Information label.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle
has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant
can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
407
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
Resetting the TPMS Sensor
Identification Codes
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the
engine off.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you replace one or more of
the TPMS sensors, rotate the vehicle’s tires, or
install a full-size spare that has a TPMS sensor,
the sensor’s identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
Each tire/wheel position is matched to the
TPMS sensor using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your GM dealer for service.
3. Press the Driver Information Center (DIC)
vehicle information button until the RELEARN
TIRE POSITIONS displays.
4. Press the set/reset button to allow the system
to learn the tire positions. The horn will sound
twice to indicate that the TPMS is ready,
and then the message TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE will display. The sensor matching
process can begin.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s
air pressure, do not exceed the maximum tire
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for
You will have two minutes to match the first
tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall, to
match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer than two minutes, to match the first tire and
wheel, or more than five minutes to match all
four tire and wheel positions the matching process
stops and you will need to start over.
five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The
horn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire position. To decrease
the tire’s air-pressure use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage
or a key.
408
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 6.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver’s side rear tire, the tire learning process
ends. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
The compact spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. If you replace one of the road tires with the
compact spare, the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM message will be displayed on the DIC
screen. This message should go off once
you re-install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by
other than an authorized service facility could
void authorization to use this equipment.
409
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Five-Tire Rotation Pattern
A five-tire rotation pattern may be used for your
professional vehicle, if it has a full-size spare
tire and wheel assembly that matches the original
equipment tires and wheels in size, type and
brand. The correct five-tire rotation pattern
is shown.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Four-Tire Rotation Pattern
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should
not be included in the tire rotation process.
Use the four-tire rotation pattern shown.
410
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) will need to have the sensors
reset after a tire rotation is performed. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
411
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
GM has developed and matched specific tires
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle while driving. If you
mix tires of different sizes, brands, or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle
may not handle properly, and you could
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage to
your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 395 for additional information.
Your vehicle may have a compact spare
tire and wheel assembly. If the vehicle has
a compact spare tire and wheel, they have
the same overall diameter as your vehicle’s
full-size tires and wheels. Because they
were designed and developed for use on
your vehicle, it is all right to drive your
vehicle with the compact spare installed
properly. Compact spare tires are designed
for temporary use only. See Spare Tire
on page 430.
412
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed on
your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a
low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would get with TPC
Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks
after many miles of driving. A tire and/or
wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on
your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center
page 327.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with
those that do not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
413
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
additional information.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
characteristics, stability, and resistance to
rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance that
you will crash and suffer serious injury.
Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
414
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and additional General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Temperature – A, B, C
Treadwear
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
415
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to
give you the longest tire life and best overall
performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular
basis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling to one side or the other,
the alignment may need to be checked. If you
notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on
a smooth road, your tires and wheels may need
to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper
diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace
it. Some aluminum wheels can sometimes be
repaired. See your GM dealer if any of these
conditions exist.
Your GM dealer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be
sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel
nuts for your vehicle.
416
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels
have a unique offset and bolt hole diameter.
Each of the wheels on the professional vehicle
have eight wheels nuts. The wheels on the
non-professional vehicle have five wheel nuts.
more information.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision
in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.
If you have to replace a wheel, use a
new GM original equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
417
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer’s instructions. To help
avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it
is contacting your vehicle, and do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them
on the front tires.
Do not use tire chains. There is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts. The area
damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and
you or others may be injured in a crash.
CAUTION: (Continued)
418
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well
out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Get the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very
bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use the jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
419
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain
in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)
420
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
To access the equipment, do the following:
for more information.
2. Press the area at
the front of the
handle located on
the cover so that the
back edge raises.
3. Grab the handle and
remove the cover.
The following information will tell you next how
to use the jack and change a tire.
421
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A)
and the wheel wrench (B).
4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer that
holds the wrench and jack.
5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and
spare tire from the trunk. See Spare Tire
on page 430 for more information.
422
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
2. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosen
them using the wheel wrench. Do not
remove them yet.
1. For models having aluminum wheels with a
center wheel cover, use the flat end of the
wheel wrench to gently pry the wheel covers
off. Be careful not to scratch the aluminum
wheel edge and do not try to remove it with
your hands. Then loosen the wheel nuts with
the wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.
423
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
3. Find the jacking location from the diagram
above and use the corresponding cutouts
located in the plastic molding.
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm)
from the rear edge of the front wheel well, and
the rear location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm)
from the front edge of the rear wheel well.
The notches may also be labeled JACK with
an arrow pointing to the jacking location on
the vehicle.
424
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you position the jack under the
rocker molding and attempt to raise the
vehicle, you could break the molding and/or
cause other damage to your vehicle. Always
position the jack so that when the jack head is
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch located
inboard from the rocker molding.
6. Put the spare tire near you.
4. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to
lower the jack lift head until the jack fits
under the vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground for the spare tire to fit under
the vehicle.
8. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the
flat tire.
5. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly
into the channel of the jack head.
425
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces, and
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time. The
wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
spare wheel.
10. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
426
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
427
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new
GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 452
for wheel nut torque specification.
5-Wheel Nuts
8-Wheel Nuts
13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut
covers, screw the nut covers on with
your fingers, then tighten one-quarter turn with
the wheel wrench.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
the wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare tire, if equipped. It will not fit. Store the
wheel cover and lug nut caps in the trunk until you
have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
428
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle,
store the flat tire in your trunk.
A. Cover
E. Jack Container
F. Spare Tire
G. Bolt
B. Wing Nut
C. Retainer
D. Jack and Wheel
Wrench
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as
possible. Store the jack and wheel wrench in their
compartment in the trunk. For storage, the jack
must be raised until the screw end is flush with the
edge of the jack.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can.
2. Reinstall the spare tire (F) making sure to line
up the wheel center hole with the bolt (G) and
place it on the compartment floor.
429
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Insert the jack container (E) into the spare
tire (F). Then insert the jack and wheel
wrench (D) into the center of the spare tire
making sure to line up the wheel nut hole with
the bolt (G) on the compartment floor.
Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will
last longer and be in good shape in case it is
needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
4. Secure the spare tire and the jack container
with the retainer (C) and then the wing
nut (B).
5. Reinstall the spare tire cover (A).
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Spare Tire
And do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It
should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire
chains on your compact spare.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made
to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced at your convenience.
430
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle may have a spare tire, which, when
new, was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose air
over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly.
regarding proper tire inflation and loading your
vehicle. For instructions on how to remove, install or
store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare is correctly inflated. Have the
damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as
soon as you can and installed back onto your
vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be available in
case you need it again.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which they
were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire
than the road tire originally installed on your
vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on
your vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
match your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels
in size and type, do not include the spare in the
tire rotation.
431
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove any accidental over-spray from other
surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply
cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to
the integrated radio antenna and the rear
window defogger. When cleaning the glass on
your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery
while cleaning.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
432
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and
gently rub toward the center. Continue
cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more can be
removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
433
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leather
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
434
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wood Panels
Weatherstrips
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that
the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Care of Safety Belts
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong
soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the
vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.
Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
agents that are petroleum based, or
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
that contain acid or abrasives.
435
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and
not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could
stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an
all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help keep the
paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
garage or covered whenever possible.
436
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to
keep their luster. Washing with water is all
that is usually needed. However, you may use
chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if
necessary.
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap, or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when
it is rinsed with water.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean
aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright metal parts.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
437
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage the
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Never
drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
438
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with
tire cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet
metal repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to
parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
439
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
440
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Usage
Vehicle Identification
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Swirl Remover Polish
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Wash Wax Concentrate
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Spot Lifter
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
441
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It
is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
components from working as they should.
• VIN
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
• Model designation
• Paint information
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
442
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
The headlamp wiring system has four individual
fuses. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring
checked right away.
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
power seats. When the current load is too
heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an
internal circuit breaker. If the wiper motor
overheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stop
until the motor cools and will then restart.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses
and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows,
there is an electrical problem. Be sure to have
it fixed.
443
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of
the identical size and rating. If a fuse should
blow, see your dealer for service immediately.
The fuses are located in two fuse blocks,
one located in the engine compartment, and the
other under the rear seat. If a fuse should
blow, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer
immediately.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has
the same amperage. Pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without — like the
radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it
is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as
you can.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the engine compartment.
Remove the fuse cover and secondary service
cover to access the fuse block.
444
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
F1
F2
F3
F4
Usage
Fuses
F5
F6
F7
F8
Usage
Engine Control Module
Transaxle Ignition
Spare
Spare
Driver’s Side Low-Beam
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Airbag Ignition
Spare
445
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
F9
Usage
Fuses
F30
F31
Usage
Usage
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Washer Pump
Spare
F10
F32
F11
F12
F13
J-Case Fuse
JC1
Heated Windshield Washer
Cooling Fan 1
Climate Controls, Instrument Panel
Cluster
F14
JC2
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
Spare
Fog Lamps
Horn
JC3
Spare
JC4
Crank
JC5
Cooling Fan 2
Windshield Wiper
Driver’s Side Corner Lamp
Passenger’s Side Corner Lamp
Oxygen Sensor
Powertrain
Engine Control Module (ECM), Crank
Injector Coil
Injector Coil
Air Conditioning
Air Solenoid
Engine Control Module, Transaxle
Control Module (ECM/TCM)
JC6
Anti-lock Brake System 2
Anti-lock Brake System 1
Air Pump
JC7
JC8
Relays
R1
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan
Crank
R2
R3
R4
Powertrain
Spare
F28
F29
R5
R6
Run/Crank
Spare
446
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
Relays
R7
Usage
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release
the front hooks.
Cooling Fan 2
R8
Windshield Wiper
Air Pump
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front
of the vehicle.
R9
R10
R11
R12
Windshield Wiper High
Air Conditioning
Air Solenoid
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear fuse block is located under the rear seat
on the driver’s side. The rear seat cushion
must be removed to access the rear fuse block.
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with
the metal on the seat cushion, you could cause
a short that could damage the battery and or
wires. Avoid contact between the rear seat and
the fuse center whenever you remove or
reinstall the rear seat. Do not remove covers
from any of the covered parts, and do not store
anything under the seats.
To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up on
the cover latch, located at the end of the fuse
block, near the battery cable.
447
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
CAUTION: (Continued)
crash. If the safety belt has not been
routed through the seat cushion at all, it
will not be there to work for the next
passenger. The person sitting in that
position could be badly injured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety
belt, then route the safety belts through the
proper slots in the seat cushion. Do not let the
safety belts get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward
and then press down on the seat cushion until
the spring locks on both ends engage.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are
properly routed and that no portion of any
safety belt is trapped under the seat.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly routed
through the seat cushion or is twisted will
not provide the protection needed in a
CAUTION: (Continued)
Also make sure the seat cushion is secured.
448
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-CaseFuses
JC1
Usage
Climate Control Fan
Fuses
F1
Usage
Amplifier
JC2
Rear Defogger (Option)
Automatic Leveling
Control/Compressor
F2
F3
Navigation - Japan (Option)
Interior Lamps
Courtesy/Passenger Side Front Turn
Signal
Canister Vent
Magnetic Ride Control Module
(Option)
JC3
F4
F5
F6
449
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
F7
F8
Usage
Leveling Compressor (Option)
Rear Seat Lumbar (Option)
Door Unlatch - Limo (Option)
Switch Dimmer
Fuel Pump
Body Control Module Logic
Airbag
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Driver’s Side Turn Signal
Passenger Side Rear Turn Signal
Not Used
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamps
Fuses
Usage
Engine Control Module, Transaxle
Control Module (ECM/TCM)
Regulated Voltage Control Sense
Not Used
Instrument Panel Harness Module
Rear Heated Seats (Option)
Not Used
Steering Wheel Illumination
Body Harness Module
Memory Seat Module Logic, Right
Front Massage (Option)
Object Detection Sensor (Option)
Sunroof
Shifter Solenoid (Option)
Retained Accessory Power,
Miscellaneous
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F36
F37
F38
F40
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
Rear Door Locks
Stoplamp - Export (Option)
Radio, S-Band
OnStar® (Option)
Auxiliary Power Outlet, Cigarette
Lighter, Console
Driver Door Module
Passenger Door Module
Trunk Release (Option)
Heated/Cooled Seats (Option)
F41
F42
F43
F44
F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
Driver’s Side Park Lamp
Passenger’s Side Park Lamp
Heated Steering Wheel (Option)
Rear Climate Control (Option)
Not Used
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
Heated/Cooled Seats, Ignition 3
Ignition Switch
Not Used
450
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Circuit
Usage
Relays
R1
R2
R3
R4
Usage
Retained Accessory Power
Park Lamps
Breakers
Front Passenger’s Seat, Memory
Seat Module
Driver’s Power Seat, Memory Seat
Module
CB1
Run
CB2
CB3
Park Lamps - Export (Option)
Front Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Fan (Option)
Trunk Release (Option)
Fuel Pump
Door Module, Power Windows
R5
Memory Seat Module,
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel
(Option)
R6
R7
CB4
Door Unlatch, License Plate Lamp
(Option)
Door Lock
R8
Resistor
Usage
Terminating Resistor
R9
F39
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
Door Unlock
Overhead Lamps (Option)
Stoplamps (Option)
Not Used
Rear Defogger (Option)
Electronic Leveling Control
Compressor
R15
451
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
12.6 qt
7.5 qt
12.0 L
7.1 L
18.5 gal
7.0 qt
70.0 L
6.6 L
Transaxle
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Automatic
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
4.6L DOHC V8
4.6L DOHC V8
Y
9
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
452
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
454
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you
have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in
good condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
455
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
{CAUTION:
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some
jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your
own maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools
and equipment for the job. If you have any
doubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to
have a qualified technician do the work.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
page 457 should be performed when indicated.
information.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
456
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see
on page 490.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
457
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
page 360 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections
are required. Required services are described
in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended
that your first service be Maintenance I, your
second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
458
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 464.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
459
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Throttle body service. An Emission
Control Service. See footnotes † and (l).
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
•
Except Professional Vehicle: Engine
cooling system service (or every five
years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service.
•
See footnote (j).
460
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Professional Vehicle Only: Engine
cooling system service (or every five
years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service.
•
•
•
See footnote (j).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (n).
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
Maintenance Footnotes
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc.
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
the California Air Resources Board has determined
that the failure to perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission warranty or limit
recall liability prior to the completion of the
vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance services be performed
at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
461
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for the hood,
rear compartment, glove box door, and console
door. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. The
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Professional vehicle uses, such as limousine
service.
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This
service can be complex; you should have
your dealer perform this service. See Engine
Coolant on page 366 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability, and emission
control performance of your vehicle. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with
these checks and services.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid
if needed.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for
deposits. Open the throttle valve and inspect
all surfaces. Clean as required.
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
463
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.
Do not forget to check the spare tire. See
make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure
to keep your engine oil at the proper level
can cause damage to your engine not covered
by your warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
464
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if
it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
465
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever
position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or others
could be injured and property could be
damaged. Make sure there is room in front
of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be
ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
466
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Power Steering
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
Automatic
Transaxle
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Engine Oil
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 366.
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Coolant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
Windshield
Washer
Hood and Door
Hinges
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric
Conditioning
Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
467
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
Engine Oil Filter
GM Part Number
22676970
ACDelco® Part Number
A1627C
PF61
89017342
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
25689297
12571535
CF118C
41–987
Wiper Blade
21.7 in (55.0 cm)
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
10374585
10374586
—
—
468
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
470
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
471
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
472
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the United States, contact
Customer Assistance and
Information
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur.
If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number
in order to give your inquiry prompt attention.
Please have the following information available to
give the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This
is available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument
panel and visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service or parts manager, contact the owner of the
dealership or the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
474
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (United States Owners): Both
General Motors and your dealer are committed to
making sure you are completely satisfied with
your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program
using the toll-free telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General
Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
this program.
475
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively you may call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at
the following address. Your inquiry should
be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns
have been addressed after the following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two.
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to
be aware of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors
of Canada Limited has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
476
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
477
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.Cadillac.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-458-8006
1-800-43-FLEET (1-800-433-5338)
(Cadillac Professional Vehicle)
1-800-833-2622
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by
dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Customer Assistance Offices
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, refer to
the addresses below.
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs)
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
478
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
479
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your
Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000
miles (80 000 km).
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more
than an auto club or towing service. It provides
every Cadillac owner with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available,
a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can
provide on-site service.
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for
the following situations:
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary
Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most
roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by
dialing 1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year. This service is provided at no charge
for any situation covered by the base warranty
coverage and at a nominal charge if the Cadillac is
no longer covered by the base warranty.
Roadside Service is available only in the United
States and Canada.
• Towing Service
• Battery Jump Starting
• Lock Out Assistance
• Fuel Delivery
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted
due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses
may be reimbursed during the
48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warranty
period. Items covered are hotel, meals,
and rental car.
480
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Service Availability
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Wherever you drive in the United States or
Canada, an advisor is available to assist you over
the phone. A dealer technician, if available, can
travel to your location within a 30 mile (50 km)
radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners
who have hearing difficulties or are speech
impaired. Cadillac has installed special
telecommunication devices called Text Telephone
(TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or
Canada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will
assist you and request the following information:
Courtesy Transportation
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home telephone
number
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
The Courtesy Transportation program is
offered to customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs
are required. This will reduce your inconvenience
during warranty repairs.
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), mileage, and date of delivery
481
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
you should contact your dealer and request
an appointment. By scheduling a service
appointment and advising your service consultant
of your transportation needs, your dealer can
help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one-way or round trip shuttle service
to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km) from the
dealership.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses
may be available, for up to a maximum of five days.
In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available, up to a
five-day maximum. Claim amounts should reflect
actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
482
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options,
such as shuttle service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your dealer for
specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for a warranty repair. Reimbursement
will be limited to a maximum amount per day and
must be supported by receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement and
meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the
General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, alternative transportation may be
available under the Courtesy Transportation
Program. Please consult your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms
and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet entitled Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty
coverage information.
483
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, and
lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not
record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle
occupants.
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has
a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some
information may be stored during regular operations
to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; other
information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
Event Data Recorders (EDR).
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
lessee,
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is
equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
484
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
485
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an
acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to
such parts are not covered by that warranty.
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
Repair Facility
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease
carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center that
has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
486
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Service
on page 480 for more information.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you
keep these items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and policy
number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
487
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If they
ask for a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.
In some states/provinces with “no fault”
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that
any required replacement collision parts be original
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty.
insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries
and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is
leased you may be obligated to have the
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if
your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
488
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
489
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you will notify us. Please call us at
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
1-800-458-8006, or write:
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000.
Or, write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors
cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product
Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting
your General Motors dealer or by calling
1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
490
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner’s
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for
all models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
491
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
492
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appearance Care (cont.)
494
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C
495
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
496
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving (cont.)
D
Daytime Running Lamps ............................. 190
497
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
498
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
499
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 402
Lamps (cont.)
500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 218
501
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
502
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 439
503
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radios (cont.)
Radio with CD ......................................... 266
504
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S
505
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
506
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
507
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
Valet Lockout Switch ................................... 108
508
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Belkin Computer Drive F5U307 User Manual
Bertazzoni Double Oven FD30 PRO XE User Manual
Bissell Vacuum Cleaner 1622 User Manual
Black Decker Oven FC100 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Portable Generator 30219 User Manual
Brinkmann Gas Grill 810 6830 B User Manual
Cabletron Systems Switch TRFMIM 28 User Manual
Cannon Fishing Equipment EASI TROLL E User Manual
Cannon Photo Scanner 300II User Manual
Chauvet Work Light Aw 7x7 User Manual